Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Notices © Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2005-2010 Manual Part Number No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means (including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language) without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies, Inc. as governed by United States and international copyright laws. Version 06.10.0001 Trademarks Microsoft®, MS-DOS®, Windows®, Windows 2000®, and Windows XP® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
In This Book This book is your guide to programming the 5000 Series oscilloscopes: Table 1 Channels InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscope Models Input Bandwidth (Maximum Sample Rate) 500 MHz (4 GSa/s) 300 MHz (2 GSa/s) 100 MHz (2 GSa/s) 4 analog DSO5054A DSO5034A DSO5014A 2 analog DSO5052A DSO5032A DSO5012A The first few chapters describe how to set up and get started: • Chapter 1, Chapter 1, “What's New,” starting on page 21, describes programming command changes in the latest version of oscil
Then, there are chapters that describe programming topics and conceptual information in more detail: • Chapter 9, Chapter 9, “Status Reporting,” starting on page 715, describes the oscilloscope's status registers and how to check the status of the instrument. • Chapter 10, Chapter 10, “Synchronizing Acquisitions,” starting on page 739, describes how to wait for acquisitions to complete before querying measurement results or performing other operations with the captured data.
Contents In This Book 3 1 What's New What's New in Version 6.10 22 What's New in Version 6.00 23 What's New in Version 5.25 25 What's New in Version 5.20 27 What's New in Version 5.15 30 What's New in Version 5.10 32 What's New in Version 5.00 33 What's New in Version 4.10 35 Version 4.00 at Introduction 36 2 Setting Up Step 1. Install Agilent IO Libraries Suite software Step 2.
Programming the Oscilloscope 50 Referencing the IO Library 50 Opening the Oscilloscope Connection via the IO Library 51 Initializing the Interface and the Oscilloscope 51 Using :AUToscale to Automate Oscilloscope Setup 52 Using Other Oscilloscope Setup Commands 52 Capturing Data with the :DIGitize Command 53 Reading Query Responses from the Oscilloscope 55 Reading Query Results into String Variables 56 Reading Query Results into Numeric Variables 56 Reading Definite-Length Block Query Response Data 56 Sendi
*OPT (Option Identification) 123 *RCL (Recall) 124 *RST (Reset) 125 *SAV (Save) 128 *SRE (Service Request Enable) 129 *STB (Read Status Byte) 131 *TRG (Trigger) 133 *TST (Self Test) 134 *WAI (Wait To Continue) 135 Root (:) Commands 136 :AER (Arm Event Register) 139 :AUToscale 140 :AUToscale:AMODE 142 :AUToscale:CHANnels 143 :BLANk 144 :CDISplay 145 :DIGitize 146 :HWEenable (Hardware Event Enable Register) 148 :HWERegister:CONDition (Hardware Event Condition Register) :HWERegister[:EVENt] (Hardware Event Eve
:ACQuire:MODE 183 :ACQuire:POINts 184 :ACQuire:SEGMented:ANALyze 185 :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt 186 :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex 187 :ACQuire:SRATe 190 :ACQuire:TYPE 191 :CALibrate Commands 193 :CALibrate:DATE 195 :CALibrate:LABel 196 :CALibrate:OUTPut 197 :CALibrate:STARt 198 :CALibrate:STATus 199 :CALibrate:SWITch 200 :CALibrate:TEMPerature 201 :CALibrate:TIME 202 :CHANnel Commands 203 :CHANnel:BWLimit 206 :CHANnel:COUPling 207 :CHANnel:DISPlay 208 :CHANnel:IMPedance 209 :CHANnel:INVert 210 :C
:DISPlay:SOURce :DISPlay:VECTors 231 232 :EXTernal Trigger Commands 233 :EXTernal:BWLimit 235 :EXTernal:IMPedance 236 :EXTernal:PROBe 237 :EXTernal:PROBe:ID 238 :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe 239 :EXTernal:PROTection 240 :EXTernal:RANGe 241 :EXTernal:UNITs 242 :FUNCtion Commands 243 :FUNCtion:CENTer 246 :FUNCtion:DISPlay 247 :FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation 248 :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1 249 :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2 250 :FUNCtion:OFFSet 251 :FUNCtion:OPERation 252 :FUNCtion:RANGe 253 :FUNCtion:REFerence 254 :FUNCtion:SCALe 255
:MARKer:MODE 276 :MARKer:X1Position 277 :MARKer:X1Y1source 278 :MARKer:X2Position 279 :MARKer:X2Y2source 280 :MARKer:XDELta 281 :MARKer:Y1Position 282 :MARKer:Y2Position 283 :MARKer:YDELta 284 :MEASure Commands 285 :MEASure:CLEar 292 :MEASure:COUNter 293 :MEASure:DEFine 294 :MEASure:DELay 297 :MEASure:DUTYcycle 299 :MEASure:FALLtime 300 :MEASure:FREQuency 301 :MEASure:NWIDth 302 :MEASure:OVERshoot 303 :MEASure:PERiod 305 :MEASure:PHASe 306 :MEASure:PREShoot 307 :MEASure:PWIDth 308 :MEASure:RESults 309 :MEAS
:MEASure:VTIMe 332 :MEASure:VTOP 333 :MEASure:WINDow 334 :MEASure:XMAX 335 :MEASure:XMIN 336 :MTESt Commands 337 :MTESt:AMASk:CREate 342 :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce 343 :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs 344 :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta 345 :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta 346 :MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms 347 :MTESt:COUNt:RESet 348 :MTESt:COUNt:TIME 349 :MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms 350 :MTESt:DATA 351 :MTESt:DELete 352 :MTESt:ENABle 353 :MTESt:LOCK 354 :MTESt:OUTPut 355 :MTESt:RMODe 356 :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure 357 :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt 358 :MTESt:RMODe:
:SAVE Commands 377 :SAVE:FILename 379 :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] 380 :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA 381 :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors 382 :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat 383 :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver 384 :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette 385 :SAVE:LISTer[:STARt] 386 :SAVE:MASK[:STARt] 387 :SAVE:PWD 388 :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] 389 :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt] 390 :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat 391 :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth 392 :SAVE:WAVeform:SEGMented 393 :SBUS Commands 394 :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:ERRor 396 :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:OVERload 397 :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:RESet 398 :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:TOTal 399 :SBUS:CAN:COU
:SYSTem:DATE 420 :SYSTem:DSP 421 :SYSTem:ERRor 422 :SYSTem:LOCK 423 :SYSTem:PRECision 424 :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK :SYSTem:SETup 426 :SYSTem:TIME 428 425 :TIMebase Commands 429 :TIMebase:MODE 431 :TIMebase:POSition 432 :TIMebase:RANGe 433 :TIMebase:REFerence 434 :TIMebase:SCALe 435 :TIMebase:VERNier 436 :TIMebase:WINDow:POSition 437 :TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe 438 :TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe 439 :TRIGger Commands 440 General :TRIGger Commands 443 :TRIGger:HFReject 444 :TRIGger:HOLDoff 445 :TRIGger:LFIFty 446 :TRIGge
:TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier 468 :TRIGger:DURation:RANGe 469 :TRIGger:EBURst Commands 470 :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt 471 :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE 472 :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe 473 :TRIGger[:EDGE] Commands 474 :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling 475 :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel 476 :TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect 477 :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe 478 :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce 479 :TRIGger:FLEXray Commands 480 :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTosetup 481 :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate 482 :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel 483 :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRor:TYPE 484 :TRIGger:FLEXray:EVENt:TYPE 48
:TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:WSELect 513 :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger 514 :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth 516 :TRIGger:I2S:WSLow 517 :TRIGger:IIC Commands 518 :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess 519 :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA 520 :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2 521 :TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:CLOCk 522 :TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:DATA 523 :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier 524 :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] 525 :TRIGger:LIN Commands 527 :TRIGger:LIN:ID 529 :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA 530 :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth 532 :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat 533 :TRIGger:LIN:
:TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA 559 :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh 560 :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk 561 :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA 562 :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe 563 :TRIGger:TV Commands 564 :TRIGger:TV:LINE 565 :TRIGger:TV:MODE 566 :TRIGger:TV:POLarity 567 :TRIGger:TV:SOURce 568 :TRIGger:TV:STANdard 569 :TRIGger:UART Commands 570 :TRIGger:UART:BASE 572 :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate 573 :TRIGger:UART:BITorder 574 :TRIGger:UART:BURSt 575 :TRIGger:UART:DATA 576 :TRIGger:UART:IDLE 577 :TRIGger:UART:PARity 578 :TRIGger:UART:POLarity
:WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource :WAVeform:TYPE 616 :WAVeform:UNSigned 617 :WAVeform:VIEW 618 :WAVeform:XINCrement 619 :WAVeform:XORigin 620 :WAVeform:XREFerence 621 :WAVeform:YINCrement 622 :WAVeform:YORigin 623 :WAVeform:YREFerence 624 615 6 Commands A-Z 7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel:LABel 662 :CHANnel2:SKEW 663 :CHANnel:INPut 664 :CHANnel:PMODe 665 :DISPlay:CONNect 666 :ERASe 667 :EXTernal:INPut 668 :EXTernal:PMODe 669 :FUNCtion:SOURce 670 :FUNCtion:VIEW 671 :HARDcopy:DESTination 672 :H
:MEASure:VSTArt 691 :MEASure:VSTOp 692 :MTESt:AMASk:{SAVE | STORe} 693 :MTESt:AVERage 694 :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt 695 :MTESt:LOAD 696 :MTESt:RUMode 697 :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure 698 :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} 699 :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce 700 :PRINt? 701 :TIMebase:DELay 703 :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge 704 :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition 705 :TRIGger:TV:TVMode 706 8 Error Messages 9 Status Reporting Status Reporting Data Structures Status Byte Register (STB) 718 721 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) Trigger Event Regi
Status Reporting Decision Chart 738 10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronization in the Programming Flow Set Up the Oscilloscope 740 Acquire a Waveform 740 Retrieve Results 740 Blocking Synchronization 740 741 Polling Synchronization With Timeout 742 Synchronizing with a Single-Shot Device Under Test (DUT) Synchronization with an Averaging Acquisition 744 746 11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Command Classifications 750 Core Commands 750 Non-Core Commands 750 Obsolete Commands 750 Valid Command
Index 20 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 1 What's New What's New in Version 6.10 What's New in Version 6.00 What's New in Version 5.25 What's New in Version 5.20 What's New in Version 5.15 What's New in Version 5.10 What's New in Version 5.00 What's New in Version 4.10 Version 4.
1 What's New What's New in Version 6.10 New features in version 6.10 of the InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscope software are: • When the zoomed time base mode is on, you can select whether the Main window or the Zoom window is used as the measurement window. • An interval specification for the V average and dc RMS measurements has been added. • A 50% trigger level command. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
1 What's New What's New in Version 6.00 New features in version 6.00 of the InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The ability to perform measurements and math functions on a 10K- point (maximum) precision analysis data record. • Support for the new N5469A MIL- STD 1553 triggering and decode option (Option 553). • Support for the new N5432C FlexRay triggering and decode option (Option FLX). More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
1 What's New Discontinued Commands 24 Command Differences :WAVeform:POINts (see page 604) In the RAW or MAXimum waveform points modes, you can now specify 4,000,000 or 8,000,000 points in place of the previous 5,000,000 option. :WAVeform:POINts:MODE (see page 604) Command syntax is the same, but the NORMal mode returns: • The measurement record when :SYSTem:PRECision is OFF. • The precision analysis record when :SYSTem:PRECision is ON.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.25 New features in version 5.25 of the InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The Lister display for showing decoded serial data in tabular format. • The ability to trigger on and decode I2S serial bus data with a four- channel oscilloscope that includes the Option SND license. • The EBURst trigger mode and supporting :TRIGger:EBURst commands. • The SEQuence trigger mode and supporting :TRIGger:SEQuence commands.
1 What's New Changed Commands 26 Command Description :TRIGger:SEQuence Commands (see page 547) Commands for triggering the oscilloscope after finding a sequence of events. :TRIGger:USB Commands (see page 585) Commands for triggering on a Start of Packet (SOP), End of Packet (EOP), Reset Complete, Enter Suspend, or Exit Suspend signal on the differential USB data lines. USB Low Speed and Full Speed are supported by this trigger.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.20 New features in version 5.20 of the InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscope software are: • Mask testing, enabled with Option LMT. • Tracking cursors (markers) have been added. • Measurement statistics have been added. • Labels can now be up to 10 characters. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
1 What's New Changed Commands Obsolete Commands 28 Command Differences :CHANnel:LABel (see page 211) Labels can now be up to 10 characters. :DISPlay:LABList (see page 229) Labels can now be up to 10 characters. :MARKer:MODE (see page 276) You can now select the WAVeform tracking cursors mode. :RECall:PWD (see page 375) You can set the present working directory in addition to querying for this information.
What's New Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} (see page 699) :RUN (see page 170) or :STOP (see page 174) :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce (see page 700) :TRIGger Commands (see page 440) Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 1 Behavior Differences There are various commands for setting the source with different types of triggers.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.15 New features in version 5.15 of the InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscope software are: • Waveform math can be performed using channels 3 and 4, and there is a new ADD operator. • Ratio of AC RMS values measurement. • Analog channel impedance protection lock. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
What's New Changed Commands Obsolete Commands Command Differences :ACQuire:COUNt (see page 181) The :ACQuire:COUNt 1 command has been deprecated. The AVERage acquisition type with a count of 1 is functionally equivalent to the HRESolution acquisition type; however, you should select the high-resolution acquisition mode with the :ACQuire:TYPE HRESolution command instead.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.10 New features in version 5.10 of the InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscope software are: • Segmented memory acquisition mode, enabled with Option SGM. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below. New Commands Changed Commands Discontinued Commands 32 Command Description :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt (see page 186) Sets the number of memory segments. :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex (see page 187) Selects the segmented memory index.
1 What's New What's New in Version 5.00 New features in version 5.00 of the InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscope software are: • Serial triggering and decode options are now available. • The :SAVE and :RECall command subsystems. • Changes to the :HARDcopy command subsystem to make a clearer distinction between printing and save/recall functionality. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below.
1 What's New Changed Commands Obsolete Commands 34 Command Differences :BLANk (see page 144) Now, you can also use this command with the serial decode bus. :DIGitize (see page 146) Now, you can also use this command with the serial decode bus. :STATus (see page 173) Now, you can also use this command with the serial decode bus. :TRIGger:MODE (see page 447) You can now select the serial triggering modes. :VIEW (see page 176) Now, you can now use this command with the serial decode bus.
1 What's New What's New in Version 4.10 New features in version 4.10 of the InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscope software are: • The square root waveform math function. • Several new hardcopy printer drivers. More detailed descriptions of the new and changed commands appear below. Changed Commands Command Differences :FUNCtion:OPERation (see page 252) You can now select the SQRT (square root) waveform math function.
1 What's New Version 4.00 at Introduction The Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscopes were introduced with version 4.00 of oscilloscope operating software. The command set is similar to the 6000 Series oscilloscopes (and the 54620/54640 Series oscilloscopes before them) except that digital channels, rear- panel 10 Mhz reference BNC input/output, and serial bus triggering/decode features are not present.
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 2 Setting Up Step 1. Install Agilent IO Libraries Suite software 38 Step 2. Connect and set up the oscilloscope 39 Step 3. Verify the oscilloscope connection 41 This chapter explains how to install the Agilent IO Libraries Suite software, connect the oscilloscope to the controller PC, set up the oscilloscope, and verify the oscilloscope connection.
2 Setting Up Step 1. Install Agilent IO Libraries Suite software Insert the Automation- Ready CD that was shipped with your oscilloscope into the controller PC's CD- ROM drive, and follow its installation instructions. You can also download the Agilent IO Libraries Suite software from the web at: • "http://www.agilent.
2 Setting Up Step 2. Connect and set up the oscilloscope The 5000 Series oscilloscope has three different interfaces you can use for programming: USB (device), LAN, or GPIB. All three interfaces are "live" by default, but you can turn them off if desired. To access these settings press the Utility key on the front panel, then press the I/O softkey, then press the Control softkey.
2 Setting Up 4 On the oscilloscope, verify that the controller interface is enabled: a Press the Utility button. b Using the softkeys, press I/O and Control. c Ensure the box next to LAN is selected ( ). If not ( ), use the Entry knob to select LAN; then, press the Control softkey again. 5 Configure the oscilloscope's LAN interface: a Press the Configure softkey until "LAN" is selected. b Press the LAN Settings softkey. c Press the Addresses softkey.
Setting Up 2 Step 3. Verify the oscilloscope connection 1 On the controller PC, click on the Agilent IO Control icon in the taskbar and choose Agilent Connection Expert from the popup menu. 2 In the Agilent Connection Expert application, instruments connected to the controller's USB and GPIB interfaces should automatically appear. (You can click Refresh All to update the list of instruments on these interfaces.
2 Setting Up You must manually add instruments on LAN interfaces: a Right- click on the LAN interface, choose Add Instrument from the popup menu b If the oscilloscope is on the same subnet, select it, and click OK.
2 Setting Up Otherwise, if the instrument is not on the same subnet, click Add Address. i In the next dialog, select either Hostname or IP address, and enter the oscilloscope's hostname or IP address. ii Click Test Connection.
2 Setting Up iii If the instrument is successfully opened, click OK to close the dialog. If the instrument is not opened successfully, go back and verify the LAN connections and the oscilloscope setup.
2 Setting Up 3 Test some commands on the instrument: a Right- click on the instrument and choose Send Commands To This Instrument from the popup menu. b In the Agilent Interactive IO application, enter commands in the Command field and press Send Command, Read Response, or Send&Read. c Choose Connect>Exit from the menu to exit the Agilent Interactive IO application. 4 In the Agilent Connection Expert application, choose File>Exit from the menu to exit the application.
2 46 Setting Up Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 3 Getting Started Basic Oscilloscope Program Structure 48 Programming the Oscilloscope 50 Other Ways of Sending Commands 59 This chapter gives you an overview of programming the 5000 Series oscilloscopes. It describes basic oscilloscope program structure and shows how to program the oscilloscope using a few simple examples.
3 Getting Started Basic Oscilloscope Program Structure The following figure shows the basic structure of every program you will write for the oscilloscope. Initializing To ensure consistent, repeatable performance, you need to start the program, controller, and oscilloscope in a known state. Without correct initialization, your program may run correctly in one instance and not in another.
Getting Started 3 To collect data, you use the :DIGitize command. This command clears the waveform buffers and starts the acquisition process. Acquisition continues until acquisition memory is full, then stops. The acquired data is displayed by the oscilloscope, and the captured data can be measured, stored in trace memory in the oscilloscope, or transferred to the controller for further analysis. Any additional commands sent while :DIGitize is working are buffered until :DIGitize is complete.
3 Getting Started Programming the Oscilloscope • "Referencing the IO Library" on page 50 • "Opening the Oscilloscope Connection via the IO Library" on page 51 • "Using :AUToscale to Automate Oscilloscope Setup" on page 52 • "Using Other Oscilloscope Setup Commands" on page 52 • "Capturing Data with the :DIGitize Command" on page 53 • "Reading Query Responses from the Oscilloscope" on page 55 • "Reading Query Results into String Variables" on page 56 • "Reading Query Results into Numeric Variables" on page
3 Getting Started 3 Click OK. To reference the Agilent VISA COM library in Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0: 1 Choose Project>References... from the main menu. 2 In the References dialog, check the "VISA COM 3.0 Type Library". 3 Click OK. Opening the Oscilloscope Connection via the IO Library PC controllers communicate with the oscilloscope by sending and receiving messages over a remote interface.
3 Getting Started Dim myMgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager Dim myScope As VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 ' Open the connection to the oscilloscope. Get the VISA Address from the ' Agilent Connection Expert (installed with Agilent IO Libraries Suite). Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("") ' Clear the interface buffer. myScope.IO.Clear When you are using GPIB, CLEAR also resets the oscilloscope's parser.
Getting Started 3 Vertical is set to 16 V full- scale (2 V/div) with center of screen at 1 V and probe attenuation set to 10. This example sets the time base at 1 ms full- scale (100 ms/div) with a delay of 100 µs. Example Oscilloscope Setup Code This program demonstrates the basic command structure used to program the oscilloscope. ' Initialize the instrument interface to a known state. myScope.IO.Clear ' Initialize the instrument to a preset state. myScope.
3 Getting Started NOTE Ensure New Data is Collected When you change the oscilloscope configuration, the waveform buffers are cleared. Before doing a measurement, send the :DIGitize command to the oscilloscope to ensure new data has been collected. When you send the :DIGitize command to the oscilloscope, the specified channel signal is digitized with the current :ACQuire parameters.
3 Getting Started The easiest method of transferring a digitized waveform depends on data structures, formatting available and I/O capabilities. You must scale the integers to determine the voltage value of each point. These integers are passed starting with the left most point on the instrument's display. For more information, see the waveform subsystem commands and corresponding program code examples in ":WAVeform Commands" on page 590.
3 Getting Started Reading Query Results into String Variables The output of the instrument may be numeric or character data depending on what is queried. Refer to the specific command descriptions in Chapter 5, “Commands by Subsystem,” starting on page 109 for the formats and types of data returned from queries. NOTE Express String Variables Using Exact Syntax In Visual Basic, string variables are case sensitive and must be expressed exactly the same each time they are used.
3 Getting Started /TLADQ NE %HFHSR 5G@S 'NKKNV "BST@K %@S@ AXSDR NE C@S@ SDQLHM@SNQ /TLADQ NE #XSDR SN AD 5Q@MRLHSSDC Figure 2 Definite-length block response data The "8" states the number of digits that follow, and "00001000" states the number of bytes to be transmitted.
3 Getting Started strResults() = myScope.ReadList(ASCIIType_BSTR) MsgBox "Timebase range: " + strResults(0) + ", delay: " + strResults(1) To read the :TIMebase:RANGe?;DELay? query result into multiple numeric variables, you could use the ReadList method to read the query results into a variant array variable using the commands: myScope.WriteString ":TIMebase:RANGe?;DELay?" Dim varResults() As Variant varResults() = myScope.
Getting Started 3 Other Ways of Sending Commands Standard Commands for Programmable Instrumentation (SCPI) can be sent via a Telnet socket or through the Browser Web Control. Telnet Sockets The following information is provided for programmers who wish to control the oscilloscope with SCPI commands in a Telnet session. To connect to the oscilloscope via a telnet socket, issue the following command: telnet 5024 where is the hostname of the oscilloscope.
3 60 Getting Started Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 4 Commands Quick Reference Command Summary 62 Syntax Elements 106 61
4 Commands Quick Reference Command Summary Table 2 Common (*) Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns *CLS (see page 115) n/a n/a *ESE (see page 116) *ESE? (see page 117) ::= 0 to 255; an integer in NR1 format: Bit Weight Name Enables --- ------ ---- ---------7 128 PON Power On 6 64 URQ User Request 5 32 CME Command Error 4 16 EXE Execution Error 3 8 DDE Dev.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 2 Common (*) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a *OPT? (see page 123) ::= 0,0, ::= , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 2 Common (*) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns *SRE (see page 129) *SRE? (see page 130) ::= sum of all bits that are set, 0 to 255; an integer in NR1 format. ::= following values: Bit Weight Name Enables --- ------ ---- ---------7 128 OPER Operation Status Reg 6 64 ---- (Not used.) 5 32 ESB Event Status Bit 4 16 MAV Message Available 3 8 ---- (Not used.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 3 Root (:) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :AUToscale:AMODE (see page 142) :AUToscale:AMODE? (see page 142) ::= {NORMal | CURRent}} :AUToscale:CHANnels (see page 143) :AUToscale:CHANnels? (see page 143) ::= {ALL | DISPlayed}} :BLANk [] (see page 144) n/a ::= {CHANnel} | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :CDISplay (see page 145) n/a n/a :DIGitize [
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 3 Root (:) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :OVLenable (see page 165) :OVLenable? (see page 166) ::= 16-bit integer in NR1 format as shown: Bit Weight Input --- ------ ---------10 1024 Ext Trigger Fault 9 512 Channel 4 Fault 8 256 Channel 3 Fault 7 128 Channel 2 Fault 6 64 Channel 1 Fault 4 16 Ext Trigger OVL 3 8 Channel 4 OVL 2 4 Channel 3 OVL 1 2 Channel 2 OVL 0 1 Channel 1 OVL n/a :OVLRegister? (see page 167) <
Commands Quick Reference Table 4 :ACQuire Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :ACQuire:AALias? (see page 179) {1 | 0} :ACQuire:COMPlete (see page 180) :ACQuire:COMPlete? (see page 180) ::= 100; an integer in NR1 format :ACQuire:COUNt (see page 181) :ACQuire:COUNt? (see page 181) ::= an integer from 2 to 65536 in NR1 format :ACQuire:DAALias (see page 182) :ACQuire:DAALias? (see page 182) ::= {DISable | AUTO} :ACQui
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 5 :CALibrate Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :CALibrate:STARt (see page 198) n/a n/a n/a :CALibrate:STATus? (see page 199) ::= ALL,, ::= an integer status code ::= an ASCII status string n/a :CALibrate:SWITch? (see page 200) {PROTected | UNPRotected} n/a :CALibrate:TEMPeratur e? (see page 201) ::= degrees C delta since last cal in NR
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 6 :CHANnel Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :CHANnel:OFFSet [suffix] (see page 212) :CHANnel:OFFSet? (see page 212) ::= Vertical offset value in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {V | mV} ::= 1-2 or 1-4; in NR1 format :CHANnel:PROBe (see page 213) :CHANnel:PROBe? (see page 213) ::= Probe attenuation ratio in NR3 format ::= 1-2 or 1-4r in NR1 format :CHANnel:PROBe:HEA
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 7 :DISPlay Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :DISPlay:CLEar (see page 225) n/a n/a :DISPlay:DATA [][,][] [,][] (see page 226) :DISPlay:DATA? [][,][] [,][] (see page 226) ::= {TIFF} (command) ::= {GRATicule} (command) ::= {MONochrome} (command) ::= {TIFF | BMP | BMP8bit | PNG} (query) ::= {GRATicule | SCReen} (query) ::= {MONochro
Commands Quick Reference Table 8 :EXTernal Trigger Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :EXTernal:PROBe (see page 237) :EXTernal:PROBe? (see page 237) ::= probe attenuation ratio in NR3 format n/a :EXTernal:PROBe:ID? (see page 238) ::= unquoted ASCII string up to 11 characters :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe (see page 239) :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe ? (see page 239) ::= {DIFFerential | SINGle} :EXTernal:PROTec
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 9 :FUNCtion Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :FUNCtion:OFFSet (see page 251) :FUNCtion:OFFSet? (see page 251) ::= the value at center screen in NR3 format. The range of legal values is +/-10 times the current sensitivity of the selected function.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 9 :FUNCtion Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :FUNCtion:SPAN (see page 258) :FUNCtion:SPAN? (see page 258) ::= the current frequency span in NR3 format. Legal values are 1 Hz to 100 GHz.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 10 :HARDcopy Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :HARDcopy:PRINter:LIS T? (see page 269) ::= [] ...
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 12 :MARKer Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MARKer:X2Position [suffix] (see page 279) :MARKer:X2Position? (see page 279) ::= X2 cursor position value in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps | Hz | kHz | MHz} ::= X2 cursor position value in NR3 format :MARKer:X2Y2source (see page 280) :MARKer:X2Y2source? (see page 280) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 o
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 13 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:DEFine DELay, (see page 294) :MEASure:DEFine? DELay (see page 295) ::= , edge_spec1 ::= [] edge_spec2 ::= [] ::= {+ | -} ::= integer :MEASure:DEFine THResholds, (see page 294) :MEASure:DEFine? THResholds (see page 295) ::= {STANdard} |
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 13 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:OVERshoot [] (see page 303) :MEASure:OVERshoot? [] (see page 303) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= the percent of the overshoot of the selected waveform in NR3 format :MEASure:PERiod [] (see page 305) :MEASure:PERiod? [] (see page 305) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH}
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 13 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:SHOW {1 | ON} (see page 314) :MEASure:SHOW? (see page 314) {1} :MEASure:SOURce [,] (see page 315) :MEASure:SOURce? (see page 315) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= { | NONE} :MEASure:STATistics (see page 317) :MEASure:STATistics? (see page 317) ::= {{ON | 1}
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 13 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:VAMPlitude [] (see page 324) :MEASure:VAMPlitude? [] (see page 324) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= the amplitude of the selected waveform in volts in NR3 format :MEASure:VAVerage [][,][] (see page 325) :MEASure:VAVerage? [][,][] (see page 325) ::= {
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 13 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:VRMS [][,][] (see page 331) :MEASure:VRMS? [][,][] (see page 331) ::= {CYCLe | DISPlay | AUTO} ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= calculated dc RMS voltage in NR3 format n/a :MEASure:VTIMe? [,] (see page 332) ::= displayed time from trigger in se
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 14 :MTESt Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:AMASk:CREate (see page 342) n/a n/a :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce (see page 343) :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce? (see page 343) ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs (see page 344) :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs? (see page 344) ::= {CURRent | DIVisions} :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta (see page 345) :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta? (see
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 14 :MTESt Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: MEASure {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 357) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: MEASure? (see page 357) {0 | 1} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: PRINt {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 358) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: PRINt? (see page 358) {0 | 1} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: SAVE {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 359) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: SAVE? (see page 359) {0 | 1} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: STOP {{0
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 14 :MTESt Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:SOURce (see page 369) :MTESt:SOURce? (see page 369) ::= {CHANnel | NONE} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models n/a :MTESt:TITLe? (see page 370) ::= a string of up to 128 ASCII characters Table 15 :RECall Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :RECall:FILename (see page 372) :RECall:FILe
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 16 :SAVE Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :SAVE:FILename (see page 379) :SAVE:FILename? (see page 379) ::= quoted ASCII string :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] [] (see page 380) n/a ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string n/a :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA? (see page 381) ::= {GRAT | SCR} :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 16 :SAVE Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt ] [] (see page 390) n/a ::= quoted ASCII string :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat (see page 391) :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat ? (see page 391) ::= {ALB | ASCiixy | CSV | BINary | NONE} :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth (see page 392) :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth ? (see page 392) ::= 100 to max.
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 17 :SBUS Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :SBUS:I2S:BASE (see page 406) :SBUS:I2S:BASE? (see page 406) ::= {DECimal | HEX} :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe (see page 407) :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe? (see page 407) ::= {BIT7 | BIT8} :SBUS:LIN:PARity {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 408) :SBUS:LIN:PARity? (see page 408) {0 | 1} :SBUS:M1553:BASE (see page 409) :SBUS:M1553:BASE? (see page 409) ::= {DECimal | HEX}
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 18 :SYSTem Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :SYSTem:DATE (see page 420) :SYSTem:DATE? (see page 420) ::= ,, ::= 4-digit year in NR1 format ::= {1,..,12 | JANuary | FEBruary | MARch | APRil | MAY | JUNe | JULy | AUGust | SEPtember | OCTober | NOVember | DECember} ::= {1,..
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 19 :TIMebase Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TIMebase:RANGe (see page 433) :TIMebase:RANGe? (see page 433) ::= 10 ns through 500 s in NR3 format :TIMebase:REFerence {LEFT | CENTer | RIGHt} (see page 434) :TIMebase:REFerence? (see page 434) ::= {LEFT | CENTer | RIGHt} :TIMebase:SCALe (see page 435) :TIMebase:SCALe? (see page 435) ::= scale value in seconds
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 20 General :TRIGger Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:MODE (see page 447) :TRIGger:MODE? (see page 447) ::= {EDGE | GLITch | PATTern | CAN | DURation | I2S |IIC | EBURst | LIN | M1553| SEQuence | SPI | TV | UART | USB | FLEXray} ::= { | } ::= query returns "NONE" if the :TIMebase:MODE is ROLL or XY :TRIGger:NREJect {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 448) :TRIGger:NREJect? (see
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 21 :TRIGger:CAN Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern: DATA , (see page 454) :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern: DATA? (see page 454) ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or (with Option AMS) ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...
Commands Quick Reference 4 Table 21 :TRIGger:CAN Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce (see page 461) :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce? (see page 461) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger (see page 462) :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger? (see page 463) ::= {SOF} (without Option AMS) ::= {SOF | DATA | ERRor | IDData | IDEither | IDRemote | ALLerrors | OVERload | ACKerror} (wit
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 23 :TRIGger:EBURst Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt (see page 471) :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt ? (see page 471) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE (see page 472) :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE? (see page 472) ::= time in seconds in NR3 format :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe (see page 473) :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe ? (see page 473) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} Table 24 :TRIGger[:E
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 25 :TRIGger:FLEXray Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTo setup (see page 481) n/a n/a :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUD rate (see page 482) :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUD rate? (see page 482) ::= {2500000 | 5000000 | 10000000} :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHAN nel (see page 483) :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHAN nel? (see page 483) ::= {A | B} :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRo r:TYPE (see page 484) :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRo
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 26 :TRIGger:GLITch Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:GLITch:GREat erthan [s uffix] (see page 493) :TRIGger:GLITch:GREat erthan? (see page 493) ::= floating-point number in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSt han [suff ix] (see page 494) :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSt han? (see page 494) ::= floating-point number in NR3 format [suffix] ::=
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 27 :TRIGger:I2S Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnmen t (see page 502) :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnmen t? (see page 502) ::= {I2S | LJ | RJ} :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio (see page 503) :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio? (see page 503) ::= {RIGHt | LEFT | EITHer} :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SL OPe (see page 504) :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SL OPe? (see page 504) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern: DATA
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 27 :TRIGger:I2S Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:D ATA (see page 512) :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:D ATA? (see page 512) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:W SELect (see page 513) :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:W SELect? (see page 513) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger (see page 514) :TRIG
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 28 :TRIGger:IIC Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger: QUALifier (see page 524) :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger: QUALifier? (see page 524) ::= {EQUal | NOTequal | LESSthan | GREaterthan} :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[ :TYPE] (see page 525) :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[ :TYPE]? (see page 525) ::= {STARt | STOP | READ7 | READEprom | WRITe7 | WRITe10 | NACKnowledge | ANACknowledge | R7Data2 | W7Data2 | RESTart} Ta
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 29 :TRIGger:LIN Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce (see page 536) :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce? (see page 536) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard (see page 537) :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard ? (see page 537) ::= {LIN13 | LIN20} :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbrea k (see page 538) :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbrea k? (see page 538) ::= integer = {11 | 12 | 13}
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 31 :TRIGger:SEQuence Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:SEQuence:COU Nt (see page 548) :TRIGger:SEQuence:COU Nt? (see page 548) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDG E{1|2} , (see page 549) :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDG E{1|2}? (see page 549) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {POSitive | NEGative} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= query returns "NONE" if edge source is
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 32 :TRIGger:SPI Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SL OPe (see page 556) :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SL OPe? (see page 556) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TI Meout (see page 557) :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TI Meout? (see page 557) ::= time in seconds in NR1 format :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing (see page 558) :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing? (see page 558) ::= {CHIPselect | NOTChipselect
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 33 :TRIGger:TV Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:TV:SOURce (see page 568) :TRIGger:TV:SOURce? (see page 568) ::= {CHANnel} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:TV:STANdard (see page 569) :TRIGger:TV:STANdard? (see page 569) ::= {GENeric | NTSC | PALM | PAL | SECam | {P480L60HZ | P480} | {P720L60HZ | P720} | {P1080L24HZ | P1080} | P1080L25HZ | P1080L50HZ | P1080L60HZ
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 34 :TRIGger:UART Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:UART:PARity (see page 578) :TRIGger:UART:PARity? (see page 578) ::= {EVEN | ODD | NONE} :TRIGger:UART:POLarit y (see page 579) :TRIGger:UART:POLarit y? (see page 579) ::= {HIGH | LOW} :TRIGger:UART:QUALifi er (see page 580) :TRIGger:UART:QUALifi er? (see page 580) ::= {EQUal | NOTequal | GREaterthan | LESSthan} :
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 36 :WAVeform Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :WAVeform:BYTeorder (see page 597) :WAVeform:BYTeorder? (see page 597) ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} n/a :WAVeform:COUNt? (see page 598) ::= an integer from 1 to 65536 in NR1 format n/a :WAVeform:DATA? (see page 599) , For example, to transmit 1000 bytes of data, the syntax would be: #800001000<1000 bytes of data> 8 is the number
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 36 :WAVeform Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :WAVeform:PREamble? (see page 606) ::= , ,,, , , ,, , ::= an integer in NR1 format: • 0 for BYTE format • 1 for WORD format • 2 for ASCii format ::= an integer in NR1 format: • • • • 0 1 2 3 for for for for NORMal
4 Commands Quick Reference Table 36 :WAVeform Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :WAVeform:XORigin? (see page 620) ::= x-origin value in the current preamble in NR3 format n/a :WAVeform:XREFerence? (see page 621) ::= 0 (x-reference value in the current preamble in NR1 format) n/a :WAVeform:YINCrement? (see page 622) ::= y-increment value in the current preamble in NR3 format n/a :WAVeform:YORigin? (see page 623
4 Commands Quick Reference Syntax Elements • "Number Format" on page 106 • " (Line Terminator)" on page 106 • "[ ] (Optional Syntax Terms)" on page 106 • "{ } (Braces)" on page 106 • "::= (Defined As)" on page 106 • "< > (Angle Brackets)" on page 107 • "... (Ellipsis)" on page 107 • "n,..,p (Value Ranges)" on page 107 • "d (Digits)" on page 107 • "Quoted ASCII String" on page 107 • "Definite- Length Block Response Data" on page 107 Number Format NR1 specifies integer data.
4 Commands Quick Reference For example, ::= indicates that can be replaced by in any statement containing . < > (Angle Brackets) < > Angle brackets enclose words or characters that symbolize a program code parameter or an interface command. ... (Ellipsis) ... An ellipsis (trailing dots) indicates that the preceding element may be repeated one or more times. n,..,p (Value Ranges) n,..,p ::= all integers between n and p inclusive.
4 Commands Quick Reference #800001000<1000 bytes of data> 8 is the number of digits that follow 00001000 is the number of bytes to be transmitted <1000 bytes of data> is the actual data 108 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 5 Commands by Subsystem Subsystem Description "Common (*) Commands" on page 111 Commands defined by IEEE 488.2 standard that are common to all instruments. "Root (:) Commands" on page 136 Control many of the basic functions of the oscilloscope and reside at the root level of the command tree. ":ACQuire Commands" on page 177 Set the parameters for acquiring and storing data.
5 Commands by Subsystem Command Types Subsystem Description ":RECall Commands" on page 371 Recall previously saved oscilloscope setups and traces. ":SAVE Commands" on page 377 Save oscilloscope setups and traces, screen images, and data. ":SBUS Commands" on page 394 Control oscilloscope functions associated with the serial decode bus. ":SYSTem Commands" on page 419 Control basic system functions of the oscilloscope. ":TIMebase Commands" on page 429 Control all horizontal sweep functions.
5 Commands by Subsystem Common (*) Commands Commands defined by IEEE 488.2 standard that are common to all instruments. See "Introduction to Common (*) Commands" on page 113.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 37 Common (*) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a *OPT? (see page 123) ::= 0,0, ::= , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 37 Common (*) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns *SRE (see page 129) *SRE? (see page 130) ::= sum of all bits that are set, 0 to 255; an integer in NR1 format. ::= following values: Bit Weight Name Enables --- ------ ---- ---------7 128 OPER Operation Status Reg 6 64 ---- (Not used.) 5 32 ESB Event Status Bit 4 16 MAV Message Available 3 8 ---- (Not used.
5 Commands by Subsystem selected and a common command is received by the instrument, the instrument remains in the selected subsystem. For example, if the program message ":ACQuire:TYPE AVERage; *CLS; COUNt 256" is received by the instrument, the instrument sets the acquire type, then clears the status information and sets the average count. In contrast, if a root level command or some other subsystem command is within the program message, you must re- enter the original subsystem after the command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 *CLS (Clear Status) (see page 750) Command Syntax *CLS The *CLS common command clears the status data structures, the device- defined error queue, and the Request- for- OPC flag. NOTE See Also If the *CLS command immediately follows a program message terminator, the output queue and the MAV (message available) bit are cleared.
5 Commands by Subsystem *ESE (Standard Event Status Enable) (see page 750) Command Syntax *ESE ::= integer from 0 to 255 The *ESE common command sets the bits in the Standard Event Status Enable Register. The Standard Event Status Enable Register contains a mask value for the bits to be enabled in the Standard Event Status Register. A "1" in the Standard Event Status Enable Register enables the corresponding bit in the Standard Event Status Register.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 38 Standard Event Status Enable (ESE) (continued) Query Syntax Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Enables: 1 RQL Request Control Event when the device is requesting control. (Not used.) 0 OPC Operation Complete Event when an operation is complete. *ESE? The *ESE? query returns the current contents of the Standard Event Status Enable Register. Return Format ::= 0,..,255; an integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem *ESR (Standard Event Status Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax *ESR? The *ESR? query returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register. When you read the Event Status Register, the value returned is the total bit weights of all of the bits that are high at the time you read the byte. Reading the register clears the Event Status Register. The following table shows bit weight, name, and condition for each bit.
Commands by Subsystem 5 Table 39 Standard Event Status Register (ESR) (continued) Return Format Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 1 RQL Request Control The device is requesting control. (Not used.) 0 OPC Operation Complete Operation is complete. ::= 0,..,255; an integer in NR1 format. NOTE See Also Reading the Standard Event Status Register clears it. High or 1 indicates the bit is true.
5 Commands by Subsystem *IDN (Identification Number) (see page 750) Query Syntax *IDN? The *IDN? query identifies the instrument type and software version. Return Format AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES,,,X.XX.XX ::= the model number of the instrument ::= the serial number of the instrument X.XX.
5 Commands by Subsystem *LRN (Learn Device Setup) (see page 750) Query Syntax *LRN? The *LRN? query result contains the current state of the instrument. This query is similar to the :SYSTem:SETup? (see page 426) query, except that it contains ":SYST:SET " before the binary block data. The query result is a valid command that can be used to restore instrument settings at a later time.
5 Commands by Subsystem *OPC (Operation Complete) (see page 750) Command Syntax *OPC The *OPC command sets the operation complete bit in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending device operations have finished. Query Syntax *OPC? The *OPC? query places an ASCII "1" in the output queue when all pending device operations have completed. The interface hangs until this query returns.
5 Commands by Subsystem *OPT (Option Identification) (see page 750) Query Syntax *OPT? The *OPT? query reports the options installed in the instrument. This query returns a string that identifies the module and its software revision level.
5 Commands by Subsystem *RCL (Recall) (see page 750) Command Syntax *RCL ::= {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} The *RCL command restores the state of the instrument from the specified save/recall register.
Commands by Subsystem 5 *RST (Reset) (see page 750) Command Syntax *RST The *RST command places the instrument in a known state. Reset conditions are: Acquire Menu Mode Normal Realtime On Averaging Off # Averages 8 Analog Channel Menu Channel 1 On Channel 2 Off Volts/division 5.00 V Offset 0.00 Coupling DC Probe attenuation AutoProbe (if AutoProbe is connected), otherwise 1.
5 Commands by Subsystem Display Menu Definite persistence Off Grid 33% Vectors On Quick Meas Menu Source Channel 1 Run Control Scope is running Time Base Menu Main time/division 100 us Main time base delay 0.00 s Delay time/division 500 ns Delay time base delay 0.00 s Reference center Mode main Vernier Off Trigger Menu 126 Type Edge Mode Auto Coupling dc Source Channel 1 Level 0.
Commands by Subsystem 5 Trigger Menu See Also Example Code External Units Volts External Impedance 1 M Ohm • "Introduction to Common (*) Commands" on page 113 ' RESET - This command puts the oscilloscope into a known state. ' This statement is very important for programs to work as expected. ' Most of the following initialization commands are initialized by ' *RST. It is not necessary to reinitialize them unless the default ' setting is not suitable for your application. myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem *SAV (Save) (see page 750) Command Syntax *SAV ::= {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} The *SAV command stores the current state of the instrument in a save register. The data parameter specifies the register where the data will be saved.
5 Commands by Subsystem *SRE (Service Request Enable) (see page 750) Command Syntax *SRE ::= integer with values defined in the following table. The *SRE command sets the bits in the Service Request Enable Register. The Service Request Enable Register contains a mask value for the bits to be enabled in the Status Byte Register. A one in the Service Request Enable Register enables the corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register. A zero disables the bit.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 40 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) (continued) Query Syntax Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Enables: 5 ESB Event Status Bit Interrupts when enabled conditions in the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) occur. 4 MAV Message Available Interrupts when messages are in the Output Queue. 3 --- --- (Not used.) 2 MSG Message Interrupts when an advisory has been displayed on the oscilloscope.
5 Commands by Subsystem *STB (Read Status Byte) (see page 750) Query Syntax *STB? The *STB? query returns the current value of the instrument's status byte. The MSS (Master Summary Status) bit is reported on bit 6 instead of the RQS (request service) bit. The MSS indicates whether or not the device has at least one reason for requesting service. Return Format ::= 0,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 41 Status Byte Register (STB) (continued) NOTE See Also Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 6 RQS Request Service When polled, that the device is requesting service. MSS Master Summary Status When read (by *STB?), whether the device has a reason for requesting service. 5 ESB Event Status Bit An enabled condition in the Standard Event Status Register (ESR) has occurred. 4 MAV Message Available There are messages in the Output Queue.
Commands by Subsystem 5 *TRG (Trigger) (see page 750) Command Syntax *TRG The *TRG command has the same effect as the :DIGitize command with no parameters.
5 Commands by Subsystem *TST (Self Test) (see page 750) Query Syntax *TST? The *TST? query performs a self- test on the instrument. The result of the test is placed in the output queue. A zero indicates the test passed and a non- zero indicates the test failed. If the test fails, refer to the troubleshooting section of the Service Guide.
Commands by Subsystem 5 *WAI (Wait To Continue) (see page 750) Command Syntax *WAI The *WAI command has no function in the oscilloscope, but is parsed for compatibility with other instruments.
5 Commands by Subsystem Root (:) Commands Control many of the basic functions of the oscilloscope and reside at the root level of the command tree. See "Introduction to Root (:) Commands" on page 138. Table 42 Root (:) Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :AER? (see page 139) {0 | 1}; an integer in NR1 format :AUToscale [[,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 42 Root (:) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :OPEE (see page 159) :OPEE? (see page 160) ::= 16-bit integer in NR1 format n/a :OPERregister:CONDiti on? (see page 161) ::= 16-bit integer in NR1 format n/a :OPERegister[:EVENt]? (see page 163) ::= 16-bit integer in NR1 format :OVLenable (see page 165) :OVLenable? (see page 166) ::= 16-bit integer in NR1 format as shown: Bit Weight Input --- ------ ---
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 42 Root (:) Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :TER? (see page 175) {0 | 1} :VIEW (see page 176) n/a ::= {CHANnel | PMEMory{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format Introduction to Root (:) Commands 138 Root level commands control many of the basic operations of the instrument.
5 Commands by Subsystem :AER (Arm Event Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax :AER? The AER query reads the Arm Event Register. After the Arm Event Register is read, it is cleared. A "1" indicates the trigger system is in the armed state, ready to accept a trigger. The Armed Event Register is summarized in the Wait Trig bit of the Operation Status Event Register.
5 Commands by Subsystem :AUToscale (see page 750) Command Syntax :AUToscale :AUToscale [[,..,]] ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The parameter may be repeated up to 5 times. The :AUToscale command evaluates all input signals and sets the correct conditions to display the signals. This is the same as pressing the Autoscale key on the front panel.
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":AUToscale:AMODE" on page 142 Example Code ' AUTOSCALE - This command evaluates all the input signals and sets ' the correct conditions to display all of the active signals. myScope.WriteString ":AUTOSCALE" ' Same as pressing Autoscale key.
5 Commands by Subsystem :AUToscale:AMODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :AUToscale:AMODE ::= {NORMal | CURRent} The :AUTOscale:AMODE command specifies the acquisition mode that is set by subsequent :AUToscales. • When NORMal is selected, an :AUToscale command sets the NORMal acquisition type and the RTIMe (real- time) acquisition mode. • When CURRent is selected, the current acquisition type and mode are kept on subsequent :AUToscales.
5 Commands by Subsystem :AUToscale:CHANnels (see page 750) Command Syntax :AUToscale:CHANnels ::= {ALL | DISPlayed} The :AUTOscale:CHANnels command specifies which channels will be displayed on subsequent :AUToscales. • When ALL is selected, all channels that meet the requirements of :AUToscale will be displayed. • When DISPlayed is selected, only the channels that are turned on are autoscaled. Use the :VIEW or :BLANk root commands to turn channels on or off.
5 Commands by Subsystem :BLANk (see page 750) Command Syntax :BLANk [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :BLANk command turns off (stops displaying) the specified channel, math function, or serial decode bus. The :BLANk command with no parameter turns off all sources. NOTE To turn on (start displaying) a channel, etc., use the :VIEW command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CDISplay (see page 750) Command Syntax :CDISplay The :CDISplay command clears the display and resets all associated measurements. If the oscilloscope is stopped, all currently displayed data is erased. If the oscilloscope is running, all the data in active channels and functions is erased; however, new data is displayed on the next acquisition.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DIGitize (see page 750) Command Syntax :DIGitize [[,..,]] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The parameter may be repeated up to 5 times. The :DIGitize command is a specialized RUN command. It causes the instrument to acquire waveforms according to the settings of the :ACQuire commands subsystem.
5 Commands by Subsystem ' because this is greater than the maximum sample rate by 5 times, ' only 400 points (or 1/5 the points) can be gathered on a single ' trigger. Keep in mind when the oscilloscope is running, ' communication with the computer interrupts data acquisition. ' Setting up the oscilloscope over the bus causes the data buffers ' to be cleared and internal hardware to be reconfigured.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HWEenable (Hardware Event Enable Register) (see page 750) Command Syntax :HWEenable ::= 16-bit integer The :HWEenable command sets a mask in the Hardware Event Enable register. Set any of the following bits to "1" to enable bit 12 in the Operation Status Condition Register and potentially cause an SRQ (Service Request interrupt to be generated.
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":AER (Arm Event Register)" on page 139 • ":CHANnel:PROTection" on page 218 • ":EXTernal:PROTection" on page 240 • ":OPERegister[:EVENt] (Operation Status Event Register)" on page 163 • ":OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register)" on page 165 • ":OVLRegister (Overload Event Register)" on page 167 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 131 • "*SRE (Service Request Enable)" on page 129 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 149
5 Commands by Subsystem :HWERegister:CONDition (Hardware Event Condition Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax :HWERegister:CONDition? The :HWERegister:CONDition? query returns the integer value contained in the Hardware Event Condition Register.
Commands by Subsystem 5 • ":OVLRegister (Overload Event Register)" on page 167 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 131 • "*SRE (Service Request Enable)" on page 129 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 151
5 Commands by Subsystem :HWERegister[:EVENt] (Hardware Event Event Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax :HWERegister[:EVENt]? The :HWERegister[:EVENt]? query returns the integer value contained in the Hardware Event Event Register.
Commands by Subsystem 5 • ":OVLRegister (Overload Event Register)" on page 167 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 131 • "*SRE (Service Request Enable)" on page 129 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 153
5 Commands by Subsystem :MERGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :MERGe ::= {PMEMory0 | PMEMory1 | PMEMory2 | PMEMory3 | PMEMory4 | PMEMory5 | PMEMory6 | PMEMory7 | PMEMory8 | PMEMory9} The :MERGe command stores the contents of the active display in the specified pixel memory. The previous contents of the pixel memory are overwritten. The pixel memories are PMEMory0 through PMEMory9.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTEenable (Mask Test Event Enable Register) (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTEenable ::= 16-bit integer The :MTEenable command sets a mask in the Mask Test Event Enable register. Set any of the following bits to "1" to enable bit 9 in the Operation Status Condition Register and potentially cause an SRQ (Service Request interrupt to be generated.
5 Commands by Subsystem Return Format ::= integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTERegister[:EVENt] (Mask Test Event Event Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax :MTERegister[:EVENt]? The :MTERegister[:EVENt]? query returns the integer value contained in the Mask Test Event Event Register and clears the register.
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":OPEE (Operation Status Enable Register)" on page 159 • ":OPERegister:CONDition (Operation Status Condition Register)" on page 161 • ":OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register)" on page 165 • ":OVLRegister (Overload Event Register)" on page 167 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 131 • "*SRE (Service Request Enable)" on page 129 158 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Commands by Subsystem 5 :OPEE (Operation Status Enable Register) (see page 750) Command Syntax :OPEE ::= 16-bit integer The :OPEE command sets a mask in the Operation Status Enable register. Set any of the following bits to "1" to enable bit 7 in the Status Byte Register and potentially cause an SRQ (Service Request interrupt to be generated.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 48 Operation Status Enable Register (OPEE) (continued) Query Syntax Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Enables: 5 Wait Trig Wait Trig Event when the trigger is armed. 4 --- --- (Not used.) 3 Run Running Event when the oscilloscope is running (not stopped). 2-0 --- --- (Not used.) :OPEE? The :OPEE? query returns the current value contained in the Operation Status Enable register as an integer number.
5 Commands by Subsystem :OPERegister:CONDition (Operation Status Condition Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax :OPERegister:CONDition? The :OPERegister:CONDition? query returns the integer value contained in the Operation Status Condition Register.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 49 Operation Status Condition Register (continued) Return Format Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 3 Run Running The oscilloscope is running (not stopped). 2-0 --- --- (Not used.) ::= integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :OPERegister[:EVENt] (Operation Status Event Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax :OPERegister[:EVENt]? The :OPERegister[:EVENt]? query returns the integer value contained in the Operation Status Event Register.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 50 Operation Status Event Register (continued) Return Format Bit Name Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 3 Run Running The oscilloscope has gone from a stop state to a single or running state. 2-0 --- --- (Not used.) ::= integer in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :OVLenable (Overload Event Enable Register) (see page 750) Command Syntax :OVLenable ::= 16-bit integer The overload enable mask is an integer representing an input as described in the following table. The :OVLenable command sets the mask in the Overload Event Enable Register and enables the reporting of the Overload Event Register. If an overvoltage is sensed on a 50 input, the input will automatically switch to 1 M input impedance.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 51 Overload Event Enable Register (OVL) (continued) Query Syntax Bit Description When Set (1 = High = True), Enables: 7 Channel 2 Fault Event when fault occurs on Channel 2 input. 6 Channel 1 Fault Event when fault occurs on Channel 1 input. 5 --- (Not used.) 4 External Trigger OVL Event when overload occurs on External Trigger input. 3 Channel 4 OVL Event when overload occurs on Channel 4 input.
5 Commands by Subsystem :OVLRegister (Overload Event Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax :OVLRegister? The :OVLRegister query returns the overload protection value stored in the Overload Event Register (OVLR). If an overvoltage is sensed on a 50 input, the input will automatically switch to 1 M input impedance. A "1" indicates an overload has occurred. You can set analog channel input impedance to 50. If there are only two analog channels, you can also set external trigger input impedance to 50.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 52 Overload Event Register (OVLR) (continued) Return Format Bit Description When Set (1 = High = True), Indicates: 4 External Trigger OVL Overload has occurred on External Trigger input. 3 Channel 4 OVL Overload has occurred on Channel 4 input. 2 Channel 3 OVL Overload has occurred on Channel 3 input. 1 Channel 2 OVL Overload has occurred on Channel 2 input. 0 Channel 1 OVL Overload has occurred on Channel 1 input.
5 Commands by Subsystem :PRINt (see page 750) Command Syntax :PRINt [] ::= [][,..,] ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | PRINter0 | BMP8bit | BMP | PNG | NOFactors | FACTors} The parameter may be repeated up to 5 times. The PRINt command formats the output according to the currently selected format (device). If an option is not specified, the value selected in the Print Config menu is used.
5 Commands by Subsystem :RUN (see page 750) Command Syntax :RUN The :RUN command starts repetitive acquisitions. This is the same as pressing the Run key on the front panel. See Also • "Introduction to Root (:) Commands" on page 138 • ":SINGle" on page 172 • ":STOP" on page 174 Example Code ' RUN_STOP - (not executed in this example) ' - RUN starts the data acquisition for the active waveform display. ' - STOP stops the data acquisition and turns off AUTOSTORE. ' myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SERial (see page 750) Query Syntax :SERial? The :SERial? query returns the serial number of the instrument.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SINGle (see page 750) Command Syntax :SINGle The :SINGle command causes the instrument to acquire a single trigger of data. This is the same as pressing the Single key on the front panel.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :STATus (see page 750) Query Syntax :STATus? ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :STATus? query reports whether the channel, function, or serial decode bus specified by is displayed. NOTE Return Format MATH is an alias for FUNCtion.
5 Commands by Subsystem :STOP (see page 750) Command Syntax :STOP The :STOP command stops the acquisition. This is the same as pressing the Stop key on the front panel.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TER (Trigger Event Register) (see page 750) Query Syntax :TER? The :TER? query reads the Trigger Event Register. After the Trigger Event Register is read, it is cleared. A one indicates a trigger has occurred. A zero indicates a trigger has not occurred. The Trigger Event Register is summarized in the TRG bit of the Status Byte Register (STB).
5 Commands by Subsystem :VIEW (see page 750) Command Syntax :VIEW ::= {CHANnel | PMEMory0,..,PMEMory9 | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :VIEW command turns on the specified channel, function, trace memory, or serial decode bus. NOTE See Also MATH is an alias for FUNCtion.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire Commands Set the parameters for acquiring and storing data. See "Introduction to :ACQuire Commands" on page 177.
5 Commands by Subsystem The :ACQuire:TYPE NORMal command sets the oscilloscope in the normal acquisition mode. For the majority of user models and signals, NORMal mode yields the best oscilloscope picture of the waveform. Averaging The :ACQuire:TYPE AVERage command sets the oscilloscope in the averaging mode. You can set the count by sending the :ACQuire:COUNt command followed by the number of averages. In this mode, the value for averages is an integer from 2 to 65536.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:AALias (see page 750) Query Syntax :ACQuire:AALias? The :ACQuire:AALias? query returns the current state of the oscilloscope acquisition anti- alias control. This control can be directly disabled or disabled automatically.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:COMPlete (see page 750) Command Syntax :ACQuire:COMPlete ::= 100; an integer in NR1 format The :ACQuire:COMPlete command affects the operation of the :DIGitize command. It specifies the minimum completion criteria for an acquisition. The parameter determines the percentage of the time buckets that must be "full" before an acquisition is considered complete.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :ACQuire:COUNt (see page 750) Command Syntax :ACQuire:COUNt ::= integer in NR1 format In averaging mode, the :ACQuire:COUNt command specifies the number of values to be averaged for each time bucket before the acquisition is considered to be complete for that time bucket. When :ACQuire:TYPE is set to AVERage, the count can be set to any value from 2 to 65536. NOTE Query Syntax The :ACQuire:COUNt 1 command has been deprecated.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:DAALias (see page 750) Command Syntax :ACQuire:DAALias ::= {DISable | AUTO} The :ACQuire:DAALias command sets the disable anti- alias mode of the oscilloscope. When set to DISable, anti- alias is always disabled. This is good for cases where dithered data is not desired. When set to AUTO, the oscilloscope turns off anti- alias control as needed. Such cases are when the FFT or differentiate math functions are silent.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :ACQuire:MODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :ACQuire:MODE ::= {RTIMe | ETIMe | SEGMented} The :ACQuire:MODE command sets the acquisition mode of the oscilloscope. • The :ACQuire:MODE RTIMe command sets the oscilloscope in real time mode. This mode is useful to inhibit equivalent time sampling at fast sweep speeds. Real time mode is not available when averaging (:ACQuire:TYPE AVERage).
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:POINts (see page 750) Query Syntax :ACQuire:POINts? The :ACQuire:POINts? query returns the number of data points that the hardware will acquire from the input signal. The number of points acquired is not directly controllable. To set the number of points to be transferred from the oscilloscope, use the command :WAVeform:POINts. The :WAVeform:POINts? query will return the number of points available to be transferred from the oscilloscope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:SEGMented:ANALyze (see page 750) Command Syntax NOTE :ACQuire:SEGMented:ANALyze This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. This command calculates measurement statistics and/or infinite persistence over all segments that have been acquired. It corresponds to the front panel Analyze Segments softkey which appears in both the Measurement Statistics and Segmented Memory Menus.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt (see page 750) Command Syntax :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt ::= an integer from 2 to 2000 (w/8M memory) in NR1 format NOTE This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. The :ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt command sets the number of memory segments to acquire. The segmented memory acquisition mode is enabled with the :ACQuire:MODE command, and data is acquired using the :DIGitize, :SINGle, or :RUN commands.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex (see page 750) Command Syntax :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex ::= an integer from 2 to 2000 (w/8M memory) in NR1 format NOTE This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. The :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex command sets the index into the memory segments that have been acquired. The segmented memory acquisition mode is enabled with the :ACQuire:MODE command.
5 Commands by Subsystem Option Explicit Public Public Public Public myMgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager myScope As VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 varQueryResult As Variant strQueryResult As String Private Declare Sub Sleep Lib "kernel32" (ByVal dwMilliseconds As Long) Sub Main() On Error GoTo VisaComError ' Create the VISA COM I/O resource. Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("TCPIP0::130.29.70.228::inst0::INSTR") myScope.IO.
Commands by Subsystem 5 For lngI = lngSegments To 1 Step -1 ' Set the segmented memory index. myScope.WriteString ":ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex " + CStr(lngI) myScope.WriteString ":ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex?" strQueryResult = myScope.ReadString Debug.Print "Acquisition memory segment index: " + strQueryResult ' Display the segment time tag. myScope.WriteString ":WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG?" dblTimeTag = myScope.ReadNumber Debug.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:SRATe (see page 750) Query Syntax :ACQuire:SRATe? The :ACQuire:SRATe? query returns the current oscilloscope acquisition sample rate. The sample rate is not directly controllable.
5 Commands by Subsystem :ACQuire:TYPE (see page 750) Command Syntax :ACQuire:TYPE ::= {NORMal | AVERage | HRESolution | PEAK} The :ACQuire:TYPE command selects the type of data acquisition that is to take place. The acquisition types are: NORMal, AVERage, HRESolution, and PEAK. • The :ACQuire:TYPE NORMal command sets the oscilloscope in the normal mode. • The :ACQuire:TYPE AVERage command sets the oscilloscope in the averaging mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem See Also • "Introduction to :ACQuire Commands" on page 177 • ":ACQuire:COUNt" on page 181 • ":ACQuire:MODE" on page 183 • ":DIGitize" on page 146 • ":WAVeform:TYPE" on page 616 • ":WAVeform:PREamble" on page 606 Example Code ' AQUIRE_TYPE - Sets the acquisition mode, which can be NORMAL, ' PEAK, or AVERAGE. myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate Commands Utility commands for viewing calibration status and for starting the user calibration procedure. See "Introduction to :CALibrate Commands" on page 193.
5 Commands by Subsystem • Starting the user calibration procedure.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CALibrate:DATE (see page 750) Query Syntax :CALibrate:DATE? The :CALibrate:DATE? query returns the date of the last calibration.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:LABel (see page 750) Command Syntax :CALibrate:LABel ::= quoted ASCII string of up to 32 characters in length, not including the quotes The CALibrate:LABel command saves a string that is up to 32 characters in length into the instrument's non- volatile memory. The string may be used to record calibration dates or other information as needed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:OUTPut (see page 750) Command Syntax :CALibrate:OUTPut ::= {TRIGgers | SOURce | DSOurce | MASK} The CALibrate:OUTPut command sets the signal that is available on the rear panel TRIG OUT BNC: • TRIGgers — pulse when a trigger event occurs. • SOURce — raw output of trigger comparator. • DSOurce — SOURce frequency divided by 8. • MASK — signal from mask test indicating a success or fail mask test.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:STARt (see page 750) Command Syntax :CALibrate:STARt The CALibrate:STARt command starts the user calibration procedure. NOTE See Also Before starting the user calibration procedure, you must set the rear panel CALIBRATION switch to UNPROTECTED, and you must connect BNC cables from the TRIG OUT connector to the analog channel inputs. See the User's Guide for details.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CALibrate:STATus (see page 750) Query Syntax :CALibrate:STATus? The :CALibrate:STATus? query returns the summary results of the last user calibration procedure.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:SWITch (see page 750) Query Syntax :CALibrate:SWITch? The :CALibrate:SWITch? query returns the rear- panel calibration protect (CAL PROTECT) switch state. The value PROTected indicates calibration is disabled, and UNPRotected indicates calibration is enabled.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CALibrate:TEMPerature (see page 750) Query Syntax :CALibrate:TEMPerature? The :CALibrate:TEMPerature? query returns the change in temperature since the last user calibration procedure.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CALibrate:TIME (see page 750) Query Syntax :CALibrate:TIME? The :CALibrate:TIME? query returns the time of the last calibration.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel Commands Control all oscilloscope functions associated with individual analog channels or groups of channels. See "Introduction to :CHANnel Commands" on page 204.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 55 :CHANnel Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :CHANnel:PROBe:SKE W (see page 216) :CHANnel:PROBe:SKE W? (see page 216) ::= -100 ns to +100 ns in NR3 format ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :CHANnel:PROBe:STY Pe (see page 217) :CHANnel:PROBe:STY Pe? (see page 217) ::= {DIFFerential | SINGle} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :CHANnel:PROTectio n (see page 218) :C
5 Commands by Subsystem Reporting the Setup Use :CHANnel1?, :CHANnel2?, :CHANnel3? or :CHANnel4? to query setup information for the CHANnel subsystem. Return Format The following are sample responses from the :CHANnel? query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command. :CHAN1:RANG +40.0E+00;OFFS +0.00000E+00;COUP DC;IMP ONEM;DISP 1;BWL 0; INV 0;LAB "1";UNIT VOLT;PROB +10E+00;PROB:SKEW +0.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:BWLimit (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:BWLimit ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:BWLimit command controls an internal low- pass filter. When the filter is on, the bandwidth of the specified channel is limited to approximately 25 MHz.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CHANnel:COUPling (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:COUPling ::= {AC | DC} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:COUPling command selects the input coupling for the specified channel. The coupling for each analog channel can be set to AC or DC.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:DISPlay (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:DISPlay command turns the display of the specified channel on or off. Query Syntax :CHANnel:DISPlay? The :CHANnel:DISPlay? query returns the current display setting for the specified channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:IMPedance (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:IMPedance ::= {ONEMeg | FIFTy} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:IMPedance command selects the input impedance setting for the specified analog channel. The legal values for this command are ONEMeg (1 M) and FIFTy (50).
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:INVert (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:INVert ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:INVert command selects whether or not to invert the input signal for the specified channel. The inversion may be 1 (ON/inverted) or 0 (OFF/not inverted).
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CHANnel:LABel (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:LABel ::= quoted ASCII string ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models NOTE Label strings are 10 characters or less, and may contain any commonly used ASCII characters. Labels with more than 10 characters are truncated to 10 characters. Lower case characters are converted to upper case.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:OFFSet (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:OFFSet [] ::= Vertical offset value in NR3 format ::= {V | mV} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:OFFSet command sets the value that is represented at center screen for the selected channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROBe (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:PROBe ::= probe attenuation ratio in NR3 format ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The obsolete attenuation values X1, X10, X20, X100 are also supported. The :CHANnel:PROBe command specifies the probe attenuation factor for the selected channel. The probe attenuation factor may be 0.1 to 1000.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYPE] (see page 750) Command Syntax NOTE This command is valid only for the 113xA Series probes. :CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYPE] ::= {SEND0 | SEND6 | SEND12 | SEND20 | DIFF0 | DIFF6 | DIFF12 | DIFF20 | NONE} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} The :CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYPE] command sets an analog channel probe head type and dB value. You can choose from: • SEND0 — Single- ended, 0dB. • SEND6 — Single- ended, 6dB.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROBe:ID (see page 750) Query Syntax :CHANnel:PROBe:ID? ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:PROBe:ID? query returns the type of probe attached to the specified oscilloscope channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROBe:SKEW (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:PROBe:SKEW ::= skew time in NR3 format ::= -100 ns to +100 ns ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} The :CHANnel:PROBe:SKEW command sets the channel- to- channel skew factor for the specified channel. Each analog channel can be adjusted + or - 100 ns for a total of 200 ns difference between channels.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :CHANnel:PROBe:STYPe (see page 750) Command Syntax NOTE This command is valid only for the 113xA Series probes.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:PROTection (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:PROTection[:CLEar] ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} When the analog channel input impedance is set to 50, the input channels are protected against overvoltage. When an overvoltage condition is sensed, the input impedance for the channel is automatically changed to 1 M. The :CHANnel:PROTection[:CLEar] command is used to clear (reset) the overload protection.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:RANGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:RANGe [] ::= vertical full-scale range value in NR3 format ::= {V | mV} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:RANGe command defines the full- scale vertical axis of the selected channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:SCALe (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:SCALe [] ::= vertical units per division in NR3 format ::= {V | mV} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:SCALe command sets the vertical scale, or units per division, of the selected channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:UNITs (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:UNITs ::= {VOLT | AMPere} ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:UNITs command sets the measurement units for the connected probe. Select VOLT for a voltage probe and select AMPere for a current probe. Measurement results, channel sensitivity, and trigger level will reflect the measurement units you select.
5 Commands by Subsystem :CHANnel:VERNier (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:VERNier ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:VERNier command specifies whether the channel's vernier (fine vertical adjustment) setting is ON (1) or OFF (0).
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay Commands Control how waveforms, graticule, and text are displayed and written on the screen. See "Introduction to :DISPlay Commands" on page 223.
5 Commands by Subsystem • Set waveform persistence. • Specify labels. • Save and Recall display data. Reporting the Setup Use :DISPlay? to query the setup information for the DISPlay subsystem. Return Format The following is a sample response from the :DISPlay? query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :DISPlay:CLEar (see page 750) Command Syntax :DISPlay:CLEar The :DISPlay:CLEar command clears the display and resets all associated measurements. If the oscilloscope is stopped, all currently displayed data is erased. If the oscilloscope is running, all of the data for active channels and functions is erased; however, new data is displayed on the next acquisition.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :DISPlay:DATA [][,][][,][] ::= {TIFF} ::= {GRATicule} ::= {MONochrome} ::= binary block data in IEEE-488.2 # format. The :DISPlay:DATA command writes trace memory data (a display bitmap) to the display or to one of the trace memories in the instrument. If a data format or area is specified, the :DISPlay:DATA command transfers the data directly to the display.
Commands by Subsystem NOTE 5 If the format is TIFF, the only valid value area parameter is GRATicule, and the only valid palette parameter is MONOchrome. If the format is something other than TIFF, the only valid area parameter is SCReen, and the only valid values for palette are GRAYscale or COLor. Return Format ::= binary block data in IEEE-488.2 # format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:LABel (see page 750) Command Syntax :DISPlay:LABel ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :DISPlay:LABel command turns the analog channel labels on and off. Query Syntax :DISPlay:LABel? The :DISPlay:LABel? query returns the display mode of the analog channel labels.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:LABList (see page 750) Command Syntax :DISPlay:LABList ::= an ordered list of up to 75 labels, a maximum of 10 characters each, separated by newline characters. The :DISPlay:LABList command adds labels to the label list. Labels are added in alphabetical order. NOTE Query Syntax Labels that begin with the same alphabetic base string followed by decimal digits are considered duplicate labels.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:PERSistence (see page 750) Command Syntax :DISPlay:PERSistence ::= {MINimum | INFinite} The :DISPlay:PERSistence command specifies the persistence setting. MINimum indicates zero persistence and INFinite indicates infinite persistence. Use the :DISPlay:CLEar or :CDISplay root command to erase points stored by infinite persistence. Query Syntax :DISPlay:PERSistence? The :DISPlay:PERSistence? query returns the specified persistence value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :DISPlay:SOURce ::= {PMEMory0 | PMEMory1 | PMEMory2 | PMEMory3 | PMEMory4 | PMEMory5 | PMEMory6 | PMEMory7 | PMEMory8 | PMEMory9} PMEMory0-9 ::= pixel memory 0 through 9 The :DISPlay:SOURce command specifies the default source and destination for the :DISPlay:DATA command and query. PMEMory0- 9 correspond to the INTERN_0- 9 files found in the front panel Save/Recall menu.
5 Commands by Subsystem :DISPlay:VECTors (see page 750) Command Syntax :DISPlay:VECTors ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :DISPlay:VECTors command turns vector display on or off. When vectors are turned on, the oscilloscope displays lines connecting sampled data points. When vectors are turned off, only the sampled data is displayed. Query Syntax :DISPlay:VECTors? The :DISPlay:VECTors? query returns whether vector display is on or off.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal Trigger Commands Control the input characteristics of the external trigger input. See "Introduction to :EXTernal Trigger Commands" on page 233.
5 Commands by Subsystem The following is a sample response from the :EXTernal query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command. :EXT:BWL 0;IMP ONEM;RANG +8.0E+00;UNIT VOLT;PROB +1.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:BWLimit (see page 750) Command Syntax :EXTernal:BWLimit ::= {0 | OFF} The :EXTernal:BWLimit command is provided for product compatibility. The only legal value is 0 or OFF. Use the :TRIGger:HFReject command to limit bandwidth on the external trigger input. Query Syntax :EXTernal:BWLimit? The :EXTernal:BWLimit? query returns the current setting of the low- pass filter (always 0).
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:IMPedance (see page 750) Command Syntax :EXTernal:IMPedance ::= {ONEMeg | FIFTy} The :EXTernal:IMPedance command selects the input impedance setting for the external trigger. The legal values for this command are ONEMeg (1 M) and FIFTy (50). Query Syntax :EXTernal:IMPedance? The :EXTernal:IMPedance? query returns the current input impedance setting for the external trigger.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :EXTernal:PROBe (see page 750) Command Syntax :EXTernal:PROBe ::= probe attenuation ratio in NR3 format The :EXTernal:PROBe command specifies the probe attenuation factor for the external trigger. The probe attenuation factor may be 0.1 to 1000. This command does not change the actual input sensitivity of the oscilloscope. It changes the reference constants for scaling the display factors and for setting trigger levels.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:PROBe:ID (see page 750) Query Syntax :EXTernal:PROBe:ID? The :EXTernal:PROBe:ID? query returns the type of probe attached to the external trigger input.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe (see page 750) Command Syntax NOTE This command is valid only for the 113xA Series probes. :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe ::= {DIFFerential | SINGle} The :EXTernal:PROBe:STYPe command sets the external trigger probe signal type (STYPe) to differential or single- ended when using the 113xA Series probes and determines how offset is applied.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:PROTection (see page 750) Command Syntax :EXTernal:PROTection[:CLEar] When the external trigger input impedance is set to 50, the external trigger input is protected against overvoltage. When an overvoltage condition is sensed, the input impedance for the external trigger is automatically changed to 1 M. The :EXTernal:PROTection[:CLEar] command is used to clear (reset) the overload protection.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:RANGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :EXTernal:RANGe [] ::= vertical full-scale range value in NR3 format ::= {V | mV} The :EXTernal:RANGe command is provided for product compatibility. When using 1:1 probe attenuation: • In 2- channel models, the range can be set to 1.0 V or 8.0 V. • In 4- channel models, the range can only be set to 5.0 V. If the probe attenuation is changed, the range value is multiplied by the probe attenuation factor.
5 Commands by Subsystem :EXTernal:UNITs (see page 750) Command Syntax :EXTernal:UNITs ::= {VOLT | AMPere} The :EXTernal:UNITs command sets the measurement units for the probe connected to the external trigger input. Select VOLT for a voltage probe and select AMPere for a current probe. Measurement results, channel sensitivity, and trigger level will reflect the measurement units you select.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion Commands Control functions in the measurement/storage module. See "Introduction to :FUNCtion Commands" on page 245. Table 58 :FUNCtion Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :FUNCtion:CENTer (see page 246) :FUNCtion:CENTer? (see page 246) ::= the current center frequency in NR3 format. The range of legal values is from 0 Hz to 25 GHz.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 58 :FUNCtion Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :FUNCtion:RANGe (see page 253) :FUNCtion:RANGe? (see page 253) ::= the full-scale vertical axis value in NR3 format. The range for ADD, SUBT, MULT is 8E-6 to 800E+3. The range for the INTegrate function is 8E-9 to 400E+3. The range for the DIFFerentiate function is 80E-3 to 8.0E12 (depends on current sweep speed). The range for the FFT function is 8 to 800 dBV.
5 Commands by Subsystem Introduction to :FUNCtion Commands The FUNCtion subsystem controls the math functions in the oscilloscope. Add, subtract, multiply, differentiate, integrate, square root, and FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) operations are available. These math operations only use the analog (vertical) channels. The SOURce1, DISPlay, RANGe, and OFFSet commands apply to any function. The SPAN, CENTer, and WINDow commands are only useful for FFT functions.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:CENTer (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:CENTer ::= the current center frequency in NR3 format. of legal values is from 0 Hz to 25 GHz. The range The :FUNCtion:CENTer command sets the center frequency when FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is selected. Query Syntax :FUNCtion:CENTer? The :FUNCtion:CENTer? query returns the current center frequency in Hertz.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:DISPlay (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :FUNCtion:DISPlay command turns the display of the function on or off. When ON is selected, the function performs as specified using the other FUNCtion commands. When OFF is selected, function is neither calculated nor displayed. Query Syntax :FUNCtion:DISPlay? The :FUNCtion:DISPlay? query returns whether the function display is on or off.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation ::= {ADD | SUBTract | MULTiply} The :FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation command sets the math operation for the g(t) source that can be used as the input to the FFT, INTegrate, DIFFerentiate, or SQRT functions: • ADD — Source1 + source2. • SUBTract — Source1 - source2. • MULTiply — Source1 * source2.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1 (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1 ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models The :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1 command selects the first input channel for the g(t) source that can be used as the input to the FFT, INTegrate, DIFFerentiate, or SQRT functions.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2 (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2 ::= CHANnel ::= {{1 | 2} | {3 | 4}} for 4ch models, depending on SOURce1 selection ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models The :FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2 command selects the second input channel for the g(t) source that can be used as the input to the FFT, INTegrate, DIFFerentiate, or SQRT functions.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :FUNCtion:OFFSet (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:OFFSet ::= the value at center screen in NR3 format. The :FUNCtion:OFFSet command sets the voltage or vertical value represented at center screen for the selected function. The range of legal values is generally +/- 10 times the current scale of the selected function, but will vary by function.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:OPERation (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:OPERation ::= {ADD | SUBTract | MULTiply | INTegrate | DIFFerentiate | FFT | SQRT} The :FUNCtion:OPERation command sets the desired waveform math operation: • ADD — Source1 + source2. • SUBTract — Source1 - source2. • MULTiply — Source1 * source2. • INTegrate — Integrate the selected waveform source. • DIFFerentiate — Differentiate the selected waveform source.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:RANGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:RANGe ::= the full-scale vertical axis value in NR3 format. The :FUNCtion:RANGe command defines the full- scale vertical axis for the selected function. Query Syntax :FUNCtion:RANGe? The :FUNCtion:RANGe? query returns the current full- scale range value for the selected function. Return Format ::= the full-scale vertical axis value in NR3 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:REFerence (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:REFerence ::= the current reference level in NR3 format. The :FUNCtion:REFerence command sets the voltage or vertical value represented at center screen for the selected function. The range of legal values is generally +/- 10 times the current scale of the selected function, but will vary by function.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :FUNCtion:SCALe (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SCALe [] ::= integer in NR1 format ::= {V | dB} The :FUNCtion:SCALe command sets the vertical scale, or units per division, of the selected function. Legal values for the scale depend on the selected function. Query Syntax :FUNCtion:SCALe? The :FUNCtion:SCALe? query returns the current scale value for the selected function.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:SOURce1 (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SOURce1 ::= {CHANnel | GOFT} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models The :FUNCtion:SOURce1 command is used for any :FUNCtion:OPERation selection (including the ADD, SUBTract, or MULTiply channel math operations and the FFT, INTegrate, DIFFerentiate, or SQRT transforms). This command selects the first source for channel math operations or the single source for the transforms.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :FUNCtion:SOURce2 (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SOURce2 ::= {CHANnel | NONE} ::= {{1 | 2} | {3 | 4}} for 4ch models, depending on SOURce1 selection ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models The :FUNCtion:SOURce2 command is only used when an FFT (Fast Fourier Transform), DIFF, or INT operation is selected (see the:FUNCtion:OPERation command for more information about selecting an operation).
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:SPAN (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SPAN ::= the current frequency span in NR3 format. Legal values are 1 Hz to 100 GHz. If you set the frequency span to a value outside of the legal range, the step size is automatically set to the nearest legal value. The :FUNCtion:SPAN command sets the frequency span of the display (left graticule to right graticule) when FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is selected.
5 Commands by Subsystem :FUNCtion:WINDow (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:WINDow ::= {RECTangular | HANNing | FLATtop | BHARris} The :FUNCtion:WINDow command allows the selection of four different windowing transforms or operations for the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) function. The FFT operation assumes that the time record repeats.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy Commands Set and query the selection of hardcopy device and formatting options. See "Introduction to :HARDcopy Commands" on page 261.
5 Commands by Subsystem Introduction to :HARDcopy Commands The HARDcopy subsystem provides commands to set and query the selection of hardcopy device and formatting options such as inclusion of instrument settings (FACTors) and generation of formfeed (FFEed). :HARDC is an acceptable short form for :HARDcopy. Reporting the Setup Use :HARDcopy? to query setup information for the HARDcopy subsystem. Return Format The following is a sample response from the :HARDcopy? query.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:AREA (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:AREA ::= SCReen The :HARDcopy:AREA command controls what part of the display area is printed. Currently, the only legal choice is SCReen. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:AREA? The :HARDcopy:AREA? query returns the selected display area.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :HARDcopy:APRinter (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:APRinter ::= { | } ::= integer index of printer in list ::= name of printer in list The :HARDcopy:APRinter command sets the active printer. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:APRinter? The :HARDcopy:APRinter? query returns the name of the active printer.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:FACTors (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:FACTors ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The HARDcopy:FACTors command controls whether the scale factors are output on the hardcopy dump. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:FACTors? The :HARDcopy:FACTors? query returns a flag indicating whether oscilloscope instrument settings are output on the hardcopy.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :HARDcopy:FFEed (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:FFEed ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The HARDcopy:FFEed command controls whether a formfeed is output between the screen image and factors of a hardcopy dump. ON (or 1) is only valid when PRINter0 or PRINter1 is set as the :HARDcopy:FORMat type. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:FFEed? The :HARDcopy:FFEed? query returns a flag indicating whether a formfeed is output at the end of the hardcopy dump.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:INKSaver (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:INKSaver ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The HARDcopy:INKSaver command controls whether the graticule colors are inverted or not. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:INKSaver? The :HARDcopy:INKSaver? query returns a flag indicating whether graticule colors are inverted or not.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :HARDcopy:LAYout (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:LAYout ::= {LANDscape | PORTrait} The :HARDcopy:LAYout command sets the hardcopy layout mode. Query Syntax :HARDcopy:LAYout? The :HARDcopy:LAYout? query returns the selected hardcopy layout mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:PALette (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:PALette ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | NONE} The :HARDcopy:PALette command sets the hardcopy palette color. NOTE Query Syntax If no printer is connected, NONE is the only valid parameter. :HARDcopy:PALette? The :HARDcopy:PALette? query returns the selected hardcopy palette color.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST (see page 750) Query Syntax :HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST? The :HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST? query returns a list of available printers. The list can be empty. Return Format ::= [] ...
5 Commands by Subsystem :HARDcopy:STARt (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:STARt The :HARDcopy:STARt command starts a print job.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :LISTer Commands Table 60 :LISTer Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :LISTer:DATA? (see page 272) ::= comma-separated data with newlines at the end of each row :LISTer:DISPlay {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 273) :LISTer:DISPlay? (see page 273) {0 | 1} Introduction to :LISTer Commands The LISTer subsystem is used to turn on/off the serial decode Lister display and return data from the Lister display.
5 Commands by Subsystem :LISTer:DATA (see page 750) Query Syntax :LISTer:DATA? The :LISTer:DATA? query returns the lister data.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :LISTer:DISPlay (see page 750) Command Syntax :LISTer:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :LISTer:DISPlay command turns on or off the on- screen lister display. Query Syntax :LISTer:DISPlay? The :LISTer:DISPlay? query returns lister display setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer Commands Set and query the settings of X- axis markers (X1 and X2 cursors) and the Y- axis markers (Y1 and Y2 cursors). See "Introduction to :MARKer Commands" on page 275.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 61 :MARKer Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MARKer:Y2Position [suffix] (see page 283) :MARKer:Y2Position? (see page 283) ::= Y2 cursor position value in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {V | mV | dB} ::= Y2 cursor position value in NR3 format n/a :MARKer:YDELta? (see page 284) ::= Y cursors delta value in NR3 format Introduction to :MARKer Commands The MARKer subsystem commands set and qu
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:MODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :MARKer:MODE ::= {OFF | MEASurement | MANual | WAVeform} The :MARKer:MODE command sets the cursors mode: • OFF — removes the cursor information from the display. • MANual — enables manual placement of the X and Y cursors. If the front- panel cursors are off, or are set to the front- panel Hex or Binary mode, setting :MARKer:MODE MANual will put the cursors in the front- panel Normal mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:X1Position (see page 750) Command Syntax :MARKer:X1Position [suffix] ::= X1 cursor position in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps | Hz | kHz | MHz} The :MARKer:X1Position command: • Sets :MARKer:MODE to MANual if it is not currently set to WAVeform (see ":MARKer:MODE" on page 276). • Sets the X1 cursor position to the specified value. Query Syntax :MARKer:X1Position? The :MARKer:X1Position? query returns the current X1 cursor position.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:X1Y1source (see page 750) Command Syntax :MARKer:X1Y1source ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MARKer:X1Y1source command sets the source for the cursors. The channel you specify must be enabled for cursors to be displayed. If the channel or function is not on, an error message is issued.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:X2Position (see page 750) Command Syntax :MARKer:X2Position [suffix] ::= X2 cursor position in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps | Hz | kHz | MHz} The :MARKer:X2Position command: • Sets :MARKer:MODE to MANual if it is not currently set to WAVeform (see ":MARKer:MODE" on page 276). • Sets the X2 cursor position to the specified value. Query Syntax :MARKer:X2Position? The :MARKer:X2Position? query returns current X2 cursor position.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:X2Y2source (see page 750) Command Syntax :MARKer:X2Y2source ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MARKer:X2Y2source command sets the source for the cursors. The channel you specify must be enabled for cursors to be displayed. If the channel or function is not on, an error message is issued.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:XDELta (see page 750) Query Syntax :MARKer:XDELta? The MARKer:XDELta? query returns the value difference between the current X1 and X2 cursor positions. Xdelta = (Value at X2 cursor) - (Value at X1 cursor) NOTE Return Format If the front-panel cursors are off, the marker position values are not defined. Make sure to set :MARKer:MODE to MANual or WAVeform to put the cursors in the front-panel Normal mode. ::= difference value in NR3 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:Y1Position (see page 750) Command Syntax :MARKer:Y1Position [suffix] ::= Y1 cursor position in NR3 format ::= {mV | V | dB} If the :MARKer:MODE is not currently set to WAVeform (see ":MARKer:MODE" on page 276), the :MARKer:Y1Position command: • Sets :MARKer:MODE to MANual. • Sets the Y1 cursor position to the specified value. When the :MARKer:MODE is set to WAVeform, Y positions cannot be set.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:Y2Position (see page 750) Command Syntax :MARKer:Y2Position [suffix] ::= Y2 cursor position in NR3 format ::= {mV | V | dB} If the :MARKer:MODE is not currently set to WAVeform (see ":MARKer:MODE" on page 276), the :MARKer:Y1Position command: • Sets :MARKer:MODE to MANual. • Sets the Y2 cursor position to the specified value. When the :MARKer:MODE is set to WAVeform, Y positions cannot be set.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MARKer:YDELta (see page 750) Query Syntax :MARKer:YDELta? The :MARKer:YDELta? query returns the value difference between the current Y1 and Y2 cursor positions. Ydelta = (Value at Y2 cursor) - (Value at Y1 cursor) NOTE Return Format If the front-panel cursors are off or are set to Binary or Hex Mode, the marker position values are not defined. Make sure to set :MARKer:MODE to MANual or WAVeform to put the cursors in the front-panel Normal mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure Commands Select automatic measurements to be made and control time markers. See "Introduction to :MEASure Commands" on page 290.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 62 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:FALLtime [] (see page 300) :MEASure:FALLtime? [] (see page 300) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= time in seconds between the lower and upper thresholds in NR3 format :MEASure:FREQuency [] (see page 301) :MEASure:FREQuency? [] (see page 301) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH}
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 62 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:PWIDth [] (see page 308) :MEASure:PWIDth? [] (see page 308) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= width of positive pulse in seconds in NR3 format n/a :MEASure:RESults? (see page 309) ::= comma-separated list of measurement results :MEASure:RISetime [] (see page 312) :M
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 62 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :MEASure:TEDGe? [, ] (see page 320) ::= direction of the waveform ::= the transition to be reported ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= time in seconds of the specified transition n/a :MEASure:TVALue? , [] [,] (see page 322) ::= voltage
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 62 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:VMAX [] (see page 327) :MEASure:VMAX? [] (see page 327) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= maximum voltage of the selected waveform in NR3 format :MEASure:VMIN [] (see page 328) :MEASure:VMIN? [] (see page 328) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format <
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 62 :MEASure Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MEASure:WINDow (see page 334) :MEASure:WINDow? (see page 334) ::= {MAIN | ZOOM | AUTO} :MEASure:XMAX [] (see page 335) :MEASure:XMAX? [] (see page 335) ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= horizontal value of the maximum in NR3 format :MEASure:XMIN [] (see page 336) :MEASure:XMIN? [
5 Commands by Subsystem When making measurements in the zoomed (delayed) time base mode (:TIMebase:MODE WINDow), the oscilloscope will attempt to make the measurement inside the zoomed sweep window. If the measurement is an average and there are not three edges, the oscilloscope will revert to the mode of making the measurement at the start of the main sweep. When the command form is used, the measurement result is displayed on the instrument.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:CLEar (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:CLEar This command clears all selected measurements and markers from the screen.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:COUNter (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:COUNter [] ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:COUNter command installs a screen measurement and starts a counter measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified. Any channel except Math may be selected for the source.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:DEFine (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:DEFine ::= {DELay | THResholds} The :MEASure:DEFine command sets up the definition for measurements by specifying the delta time or threshold values. Changing these values may affect the results of other measure commands. The table below identifies which measurement results that can be affected by redefining the DELay specification or the THResholds values.
5 Commands by Subsystem This command defines the behavior of the :MEASure:DELay? query by specifying the start and stop edge to be used. specifies the slope and edge number on source1. specifies the slope and edge number on source2.
5 Commands by Subsystem Return Format for = DELay: { | | ,} for = THResholds and = PERCent: THR,PERC,,, , , ::= A number specifying the upper, middle, and lower threshold percentage values between Vbase and Vtop in NR3 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:DELay (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:DELay [][,] , ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:DELay command places the instrument in the continuous measurement mode and starts a delay measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem Vtop. If you want to move the delay measurement point nearer to Vtop or Vbase, you must change the threshold values with the :MEASure:DEFine THResholds command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:DUTYcycle (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:DUTYcycle [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:DUTYcycle command installs a screen measurement and starts a duty cycle measurement on the current :MEASure:SOURce. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:FALLtime (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:FALLtime [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:FALLtime command installs a screen measurement and starts a fall- time measurement. For highest measurement accuracy, set the sweep speed as fast as possible, while leaving the falling edge of the waveform on the display.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:FREQuency (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:FREQuency [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:FREQuency command installs a screen measurement and starts a frequency measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:NWIDth (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:NWIDth [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:NWIDth command installs a screen measurement and starts a negative pulse width measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:OVERshoot (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:OVERshoot [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:OVERshoot command installs a screen measurement and starts an overshoot measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":MEASure:VTOP" on page 333 • ":MEASure:VBASe" on page 326 • ":MEASure:VMIN" on page 328 304 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:PERiod (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:PERiod [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:PERiod command installs a screen measurement and starts the period measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:PHASe (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:PHASe [][,] , ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:PHASe command places the instrument in the continuous measurement mode and starts a phase measurement.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:PREShoot (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:PREShoot [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:PREShoot command installs a screen measurement and starts a preshoot measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:PWIDth (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:PWIDth [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:PWIDth command installs a screen measurement and starts the positive pulse width measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:RESults (see page 750) Query Syntax :MEASure:RESults? The :MEASure:RESults? query returns the results of the continuously displayed measurements. The response to the MEASure:RESults? query is a list of comma- separated values. If more than one measurement is running continuously, the :MEASure:RESults return values are duplicated for each continuous measurement from the first to last (left to right) result displayed.
5 Commands by Subsystem Private Declare Sub Sleep Lib "kernel32" (ByVal dwMilliseconds As Long) Sub Main() On Error GoTo VisaComError ' Create the VISA COM I/O resource. Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("TCPIP0::130.29.70.228::inst0::INSTR") ' Initialize. myScope.IO.Clear ' Clear the interface. myScope.WriteString "*RST" ' Reset to the defaults. myScope.WriteString "*CLS" ' Clear the status data structures. myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 ValueColumnArray(5) = "Std_Dev" ValueColumnArray(6) = "Count" Dim ValueColumn As Variant For Each ResultType In ResultsTypeArray myScope.WriteString ":MEASure:STATistics " + ResultType ' Get the statistics results. Dim intCounter As Integer intCounter = 0 myScope.WriteString ":MEASure:RESults?" ResultsList() = myScope.ReadList For Each Measurement In MeasurementArray If ResultType = "ON" Then ' All statistics.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:RISetime (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure: RISetime [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:RISetime command installs a screen measurement and starts a rise- time measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:SDEViation (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:SDEViation [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:SDEViation command installs a screen measurement and starts std deviation measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:SHOW (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:SHOW ::= {1 | ON} The :MEASure:SHOW command enables markers for tracking measurements on the display. This feature is always on. Query Syntax :MEASure:SHOW? The :MEASure:SHOW? query returns the current state of the markers.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:SOURce [,] , ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:SOURce command sets the default sources for measurements. The specified sources are used as the sources for the MEASure subsystem commands if the sources are not explicitly set with the command.
5 Commands by Subsystem myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:FREQUENCY?" ' Query for frequency. varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Read frequency. MsgBox "Frequency:" + vbCrLf _ + FormatNumber(varQueryResult / 1000, 4) + " kHz" myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:DUTYCYCLE?" ' Query for duty cycle. varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Read duty cycle. MsgBox "Duty cycle:" + vbCrLf _ + FormatNumber(varQueryResult, 3) + "%" myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:RISETIME?" ' Query for risetime. varQueryResult = myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:STATistics (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:STATistics ::= {{ON | 1} | CURRent | MINimum | MAXimum | MEAN | STDDev | COUNt} The :MEASure:STATistics command determines the type of information returned by the :MEASure:RESults? query. ON means all the statistics are on. Query Syntax :MEASure:STATistics? The :MEASure:STATistics? query returns the current statistics mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:STATistics:INCRement (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:STATistics:INCRement This command updates the statistics once (incrementing the count by one) using the current measurement values. It corresponds to the front panel Increment Statistics softkey in the Measurement Statistics Menu. This command lets you, for example, gather statistics over multiple pulses captured in a single acquisition.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:STATistics:RESet (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:STATistics:RESet This command resets the measurement statistics, zeroing the counts. Note that the measurement (statistics) configuration is not deleted.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:TEDGe (see page 750) Query Syntax :MEASure:TEDGe? [,] ::= direction of the waveform. A rising slope is indicated by a space or plus sign (+). A falling edge is indicated by a minus sign (-). ::= the transition to be reported. If the occurrence number is one, the first crossing from the left screen edge is reported. If the number is two, the second crossing is reported, etc.
Commands by Subsystem Return Format 5 ::= time in seconds of the specified transition in NR3 format :MEASure:TEDGe Code ' Make a delay measurement between channel 1 and 2. Dim dblChan1Edge1 As Double Dim dblChan2Edge1 As Double Dim dblChan1Edge2 As Double Dim dblDelay As Double Dim dblPeriod As Double Dim dblPhase As Double ' Query time at 1st rising edge on ch1. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:TEDGE? +1, CHAN1" ' Read time at edge 1 on ch 1. dblChan1Edge1 = myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:TVALue (see page 750) Query Syntax :MEASure:TVALue? , [][,] ::= the vertical value that the waveform must cross. The value can be volts or a math function value such as dB, Vs, or V/s. ::= direction of the waveform. A rising slope is indicated by a plus sign (+). A falling edge is indicated by a minus sign (-). ::= the transition to be reported. If the occurrence number is one, the first crossing is reported.
Commands by Subsystem 5 ::= time in seconds of the specified value crossing in NR3 format See Also • "Introduction to :MEASure Commands" on page 290 • ":MEASure:TEDGe" on page 320 • ":MEASure:VTIMe" on page 332 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 323
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VAMPlitude (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VAMPlitude [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VAMPlitude command installs a screen measurement and starts a vertical amplitude measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VAVerage (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VAVerage [][,][] ::= {CYCLe | DISPlay | AUTO} ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VAVerage command installs a screen measurement and starts an average value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VBASe (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VBASe [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VBASe command installs a screen measurement and starts a waveform base value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VMAX (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VMAX [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VMAX command installs a screen measurement and starts a maximum vertical value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VMIN (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VMIN [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VMIN command installs a screen measurement and starts a minimum vertical value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VPP (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VPP [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VPP command installs a screen measurement and starts a vertical peak- to- peak measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VRATio (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VRATio [][,] , ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VRATio command places the instrument in the continuous measurement mode and starts a ratio measurement.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VRMS (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VRMS [][,][] ::= {CYCLe | DISPlay | AUTO} ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VRMS command installs a screen measurement and starts a dc RMS value measurement. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:VTIMe (see page 750) Query Syntax :MEASure:VTIMe? [,] ::= time from trigger in seconds ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VTIMe? query returns the value at a specified time on the source specified with :MEASure:SOURce.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MEASure:VTOP (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VTOP [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:VTOP command installs a screen measurement and starts a waveform top value measurement. NOTE Query Syntax This query is not available if the source is FFT (Fast Fourier Transform).
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:WINDow (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:WINDow ::= {MAIN | ZOOM | AUTO} The :MEASure:WINDow command specifies, in the zoomed time base mode, which window is used as the measurement window: • MAIN — the measurement window is the Main window. • ZOOM — the measurement window is the Zoom window. • AUTO — the measurement is attempted in the Zoom window; if it cannot be made there, the Main window is used.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:XMAX (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:XMAX [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:XMAX command installs a screen measurement and starts an X- at- Max- Y measurement on the selected window. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MEASure:XMIN (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:XMIN [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:XMIN command installs a screen measurement and starts an X- at- Min- Y measurement on the selected window. If the optional source parameter is specified, the current source is modified.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt Commands The MTESt subsystem commands and queries control the mask test features. See "Introduction to :MTESt Commands" on page 339.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 63 :MTESt Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:OUTPut (see page 355) :MTESt:OUTPut? (see page 355) ::= {FAIL | PASS} :MTESt:RMODe (see page 356) :MTESt:RMODe? (see page 356) ::= {FORever | TIME | SIGMa | WAVeforms} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: MEASure {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 357) :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: MEASure? (see page 357) {0 | 1} :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion: PRINt {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see pa
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 63 :MTESt Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 (see page 368) :MTESt:SCALe:Y2? (see page 368) ::= Y2 value in NR3 format :MTESt:SOURce (see page 369) :MTESt:SOURce? (see page 369) ::= {CHANnel | NONE} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for 4ch models ::= {1 | 2} for 2ch models n/a :MTESt:TITLe? (see page 370) ::= a string of up to 128 ASCII characters Introduction to :MTESt
5 Commands by Subsystem Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("TCPIP0::130.29.70.228::inst0::INSTR") myScope.IO.Clear ' Clear the interface. ' Make sure oscilloscope is running. myScope.WriteString ":RUN" ' Set mask test termination conditions. myScope.WriteString ":MTESt:RMODe SIGMa" myScope.WriteString ":MTESt:RMODe?" strQueryResult = myScope.ReadString Debug.Print "Mask test termination mode: " + strQueryResult myScope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 lngElapsed = 0 Do While lngElapsed <= lngTimeout myScope.WriteString ":OPERegister:CONDition?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Operation Status Condition Register MTE bit (bit 9, &H200). If (varQueryResult And &H200) <> 0 Then Exit Do Else Sleep 100 ' Small wait to prevent excessive queries. lngElapsed = lngElapsed + 100 End If Loop ' Look for RUN bit = stopped (mask test termination). lngElapsed = 0 Do While lngElapsed <= lngTimeout myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:CREate (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:CREate The :MTESt:AMASk:CREate command automatically constructs a mask around the current selected channel, using the tolerance parameters defined by the :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta, :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta, and :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs commands. The mask only encompasses the portion of the waveform visible on the display, so you must ensure that the waveform is acquired and displayed consistently to obtain repeatable results.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MTESt:AMASk:SOURce command selects the source for the interpretation of the :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta and :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta parameters when :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs is set to CURRent.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs ::= {CURRent | DIVisions} The :MTESt:AMASk:UNITs command alters the way the mask test subsystem interprets the tolerance parameters for automasking as defined by :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta and :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta commands. • CURRent — the mask test subsystem uses the units as set by the :CHANnel:UNITs command, usually time for X and voltage for Y.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta ::= X delta value in NR3 format The :MTESt:AMASk:XDELta command sets the tolerance in the X direction around the waveform for the automasking feature. The absolute value of the tolerance will be added and subtracted to horizontal values of the waveform to determine the boundaries of the mask.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta ::= Y delta value in NR3 format The :MTESt:AMASk:YDELta command sets the vertical tolerance around the waveform for the automasking feature. The absolute value of the tolerance will be added and subtracted to vertical values of the waveform to determine the boundaries of the mask.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms (see page 750) Query Syntax :MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms? [CHANnel] ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms? query returns the total number of failed waveforms in the current mask test run. This count is for all regions and all waveforms. Return Format ::= number of failed waveforms in NR1 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:COUNt:RESet (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:COUNt:RESet The :MTESt:COUNt:RESet command resets the mask statistics.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:COUNt:TIME (see page 750) Query Syntax :MTESt:COUNt:TIME? The :MTESt:COUNt:TIME? query returns the elapsed time in the current mask test run. Return Format
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms (see page 750) Query Syntax :MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms? The :MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms? query returns the total number of waveforms acquired in the current mask test run. Return Format ::= number of waveforms in NR1 format.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:DATA ::= binary block data in IEEE 488.2 # format. The :MTESt:DATA command loads a mask from binary block data. Query Syntax :MTESt:DATA? The :MTESt:DATA? query returns a mask in binary block data format. The format for the data transmission is the # format defined in the IEEE 488.2 specification. Return Format ::= binary block data in IEEE 488.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:DELete (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:DELete The :MTESt:DELete command clears the currently loaded mask.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:ENABle (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:ENABle ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:ENABle command enables or disables the mask test features. • ON — Enables the mask test features. • OFF — Disables the mask test features. Query Syntax :MTESt:ENABle? The :MTESt:ENABle? query returns the current state of mask test features.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:LOCK (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:LOCK ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:LOCK command enables or disables the mask lock feature: • ON — Locks a mask to the SOURce. As the vertical or horizontal scaling or position of the SOURce changes, the mask is redrawn accordingly. • OFF — The mask is static and does not move. Query Syntax :MTESt:LOCK? The :MTESt:LOCK? query returns the current mask lock setting.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:OUTPut (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:OUTPut ::= {FAIL | PASS} The :MTESt:OUTPut command selects the mask test output condition: • FAIL — the output occurs when there are mask test failures. • PASS — the output occurs when the mask test passes. You can place the mask test signal on the rear panel TRIG OUT BNC using the ":CALibrate:OUTPut" on page 197 command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe ::= {FORever | SIGMa | TIME | WAVeforms} The :MTESt:RMODe command specifies the termination conditions for the mask test: • FORever — the mask test runs until it is turned off. • SIGMa — the mask test runs until the Sigma level is reached. This level is set by the ":MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa" on page 361 command. • TIME — the mask test runs for a fixed amount of time.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure command sets measuring only mask failures on or off. When ON, measurements and measurement statistics run only on waveforms that contain a mask violation; passing waveforms do not affect measurements and measurement statistics. This mode is not available when the acquisition mode is set to Averaging.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt command sets printing on mask failures on or off. NOTE Setting :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt ON automatically sets :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE OFF. See ":HARDcopy Commands" on page 260 for more information on setting the hardcopy device and formatting options.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE command sets saving on mask failures on or off. NOTE Setting :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE ON automatically sets :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt OFF. See ":SAVE Commands" on page 377 for more information on save options.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP command sets stopping on a mask failure on or off. When this setting is ON and a mask violation is detected, the mask test is stopped and the acquisition system is stopped. Query Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP? The :MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP? query returns the current mask failure stop setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa ::= from 0.1 to 9.3 in NR3 format When the :MTESt:RMODe command is set to SIGMa, the :MTESt:RMODe:SIGMa command sets the test sigma level to which a mask test runs. Test sigma is the best achievable process sigma, assuming no failures. (Process sigma is calculated using the number of failures per test.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:TIME (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:TIME ::= from 1 to 86400 in NR3 format When the :MTESt:RMODe command is set to TIME, the :MTESt:RMODe:TIME command sets the number of seconds for a mask test to run. Query Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:TIME? The :MTESt:RMODe:TIME? query returns the number of seconds currently set.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms ::= number of waveforms in NR1 format from 1 to 2,000,000,000 When the :MTESt:RMODe command is set to WAVeforms, the :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms command sets the number of waveform acquisitions that are mask tested. Query Syntax :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms? The :MTESt:RMODe:WAVeforms? query returns the number of waveforms currently set.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SCALe:BIND (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:BIND ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:SCALe:BIND command enables or disables Bind 1 & 0 Levels (Bind - 1 & 0 Levels for inverted masks) control: • ON — If the Bind 1 & 0 Levels control is enabled, the 1 Level and the 0 Level controls track each other. Adjusting either the 1 Level or the 0 Level control shifts the position of the mask up or down without changing its size.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SCALe:X1 (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:X1 ::= X1 value in NR3 format The :MTESt:SCALe:X1 command defines where X=0 in the base coordinate system used for mask testing. The other X- coordinate is defined by the :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta ::= X delta value in NR3 format The :MTESt:SCALe:XDELta command defines the position of the X2 marker with respect to the X1 marker. In the mask test coordinate system, the X1 marker defines where X=0; thus, the X2 marker defines where X=1.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :MTESt:SCALe:Y1 (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:Y1 ::= Y1 value in NR3 format The :MTESt:SCALe:Y1 command defines where Y=0 in the coordinate system for mask testing. All Y values of vertices in the coordinate system are defined with respect to the boundaries set by SCALe:Y1 and SCALe:Y2 according to the equation: Y = (Y * (Y2 - Y1)) + Y1 Thus, if you set Y1 to 100 mV, and Y2 to 1 V, a Y value of 0.100 in a vertex is at 190 mV.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 ::= Y2 value in NR3 format The :MTESt:SCALe:Y2 command defines the Y2 marker in the coordinate system for mask testing. All Y values of vertices in the coordinate system are defined with respect to the boundaries defined by SCALe:Y1 and SCALe:Y2 according to the following equation: Y = (Y * (Y2 - Y1)) + Y1 Thus, if you set Y1 to 100 mV, and Y2 to 1 V, a Y value of 0.100 in a vertex is at 190 mV.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:SOURce ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MTESt:SOURce command selects the channel which is configured by the commands contained in a mask file when it is loaded. Query Syntax :MTESt:SOURce? The :MTESt:SOURce? query returns the channel which is configured by the commands contained in the current mask file.
5 Commands by Subsystem :MTESt:TITLe (see page 750) Query Syntax :MTESt:TITLe? The :MTESt:TITLe? query returns the mask title which is a string of up to 128 characters. The title is displayed in the mask test dialog box and mask test tab when a mask file is loaded. Return Format
::= a string of up to 128 ASCII characters.Commands by Subsystem 5 :RECall Commands Recall previously saved oscilloscope setups and traces. See "Introduction to :RECall Commands" on page 371.
5 Commands by Subsystem :RECall:FILename (see page 750) Command Syntax :RECall:FILename ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:FILename command specifies the source for any RECall operations. NOTE Query Syntax This command specifies a file's base name only, without path information or an extension. :RECall:FILename? The :RECall:FILename? query returns the current RECall filename.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :RECall:IMAGe[:STARt] (see page 750) Command Syntax :RECall:IMAGe[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:IMAGe[:STARt] command recalls a trace (TIFF) image. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".tif".
5 Commands by Subsystem :RECall:MASK[:STARt] (see page 750) Command Syntax :RECall:MASK[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-3; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:MASK[:STARt] command recalls a mask. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".msk".
5 Commands by Subsystem :RECall:PWD (see page 750) Command Syntax :RECall:PWD ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:PWD command sets the present working directory for recall operations. Query Syntax :RECall:PWD? The :RECall:PWD? query returns the currently set working directory for recall operations.
5 Commands by Subsystem :RECall:SETup[:STARt] (see page 750) Command Syntax :RECall:SETup[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :RECall:SETup[:STARt] command recalls an oscilloscope setup. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".scp".
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE Commands Save oscilloscope setups and traces, screen images, and data. See "Introduction to :SAVE Commands" on page 378.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 65 :SAVE Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] [] (see page 389) n/a ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt ] [] (see page 390) n/a ::= quoted ASCII string :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat (see page 391) :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat ? (see page 391) ::= {ALB | ASCiixy
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:FILename (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:FILename ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:FILename command specifies the source for any SAVE operations. NOTE Query Syntax This command specifies a file's base name only, without path information or an extension. :SAVE:FILename? The :SAVE:FILename? query returns the current SAVE filename.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt] command saves an image.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA (see page 750) Query Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA? The :SAVE:IMAGe:AREA? query returns the selected image area. If the :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat is TIFF, the area is GRAT (graticule). Otherwise, it is SCR (screen).
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The :SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors command controls whether the oscilloscope factors are output along with the image. NOTE Query Syntax Factors are written to a separate file with the same path and base name but with the ".txt" extension.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat ::= {TIFF | {BMP | BMP24bit} | BMP8bit | PNG} The :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat command sets the image format type. Query Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat? The :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat? query returns the selected image format type. Return Format ::= {TIFF | BMP | BMP8 | PNG | NONE} When NONE is returned, it indicates that a waveform data file format is currently selected.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver command controls whether the graticule colors are inverted or not. Query Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver? The :SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver? query returns a flag indicating whether graticule colors are inverted or not.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | MONochrome} The :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette command sets the image palette color. NOTE Query Syntax MONochrome is the only valid choice when the :SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat is TIFF. COLor and GRAYscale are the only valid choices when the format is not TIFF. :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette? The :SAVE:IMAGe:PALette? query returns the selected image palette color.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:LISTer[:STARt] (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:LISTer[:STARt] [] ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:LISTer[:STARt] command saves the Lister display data to a file. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".csv".
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:MASK[:STARt] (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:MASK[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-3; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:MASK[:STARt] command saves a mask. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".msk".
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:PWD (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:PWD ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:PWD command sets the present working directory for save operations. Query Syntax :SAVE:PWD? The :SAVE:PWD? query returns the currently set working directory for save operations.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] [] ::= { | } ::= 0-9; an integer in NR1 format ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:SETup[:STARt] command saves an oscilloscope setup. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , it must be ".scp".
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt] (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt] [] ::= quoted ASCII string The :SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt] command saves oscilloscope waveform data to a file. NOTE See Also If a file extension is provided as part of a specified , and it does not match the extension expected by the format specified in :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat, the format will be changed if the extension is a valid waveform file extension.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat ::= {ALB | ASCiixy | CSV | BINary} The :SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat command sets the waveform data format type: • ALB — creates an Agilent module binary format file. These files can be viewed offline by the Agilent Logic Analyzer application software. The proper file extension for this format is ".alb".
5 Commands by Subsystem :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth ::= 100 to max. length; an integer in NR1 format The :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth command sets the waveform data length (that is, the number of points saved). Query Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth? The :SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth? query returns the specified waveform data length. Return Format ::= 100 to max.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SAVE:WAVeform:SEGMented (see page 750) Command Syntax :SAVE:WAVeform:SEGMented
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS Commands Control oscilloscope functions associated with the serial decode bus. See "Introduction to :SBUS Commands" on page 395.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 66 :SBUS Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :SBUS:SPI:BITorder (see page 411) :SBUS:SPI:BITorder? (see page 411) ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh (see page 412) :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh? (see page 412) ::= integer 4-16 in NR1 format :SBUS:UART:BASE (see page 413) :SBUS:UART:BASE? (see page 413) ::= {ASCii | BINary | HEX} n/a :SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRo r? (see page 414)
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:ERRor (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:ERRor? Returns the error frame count.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:OVERload (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:OVERload? Returns the overload frame count.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:RESet (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:RESet Resets the frame counters.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:TOTal (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:TOTal? Returns the total frame count.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:UTILization (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:CAN:COUNt:UTILization? Returns the percent utilization.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:DISPlay (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:DISPlay ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SBUS:DISPlay command turns displaying of the serial decode bus on or off. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when a serial decode option has been licensed. :SBUS:DISPlay? The :SBUS:DISPlay? query returns the current display setting of the serial decode bus.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:NULL (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:NULL? Returns the FlexRay null frame count.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:RESet (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:RESet Resets the FlexRay frame counters.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:SYNC (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:SYNC? Returns the FlexRay sync frame count.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:TOTal (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:FLEXray:COUNt:TOTal? Returns the FlexRay total frame count.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:I2S:BASE (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:I2S:BASE ::= {DECimal | HEX} The :SBUS:I2S:BASE command determines the base to use for the I2S decode display. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the I2S serial decode option (Option SND) has been licensed. :SBUS:I2S:BASE? The :SBUS:I2S:BASE? query returns the current I2S display decode base.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe ::= {BIT7 | BIT8} The :SBUS:IIC:ASIZe command determines whether the Read/Write bit is included as the LSB in the display of the IIC address field of the decode bus. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the low-speed IIC and SPI serial decode option (Option LSS) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:LIN:PARity (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:LIN:PARity ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SBUS:LIN:PARity command determines whether the parity bits are included as the most significant bits (MSB) in the display of the Frame Id field in the LIN decode bus. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the automotive CAN and LIN serial decode option (Option AMS) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:M1553:BASE (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:M1553:BASE ::= {BINary | HEX} The :SBUS:M1553:BASE command determines the base to use for the MIL- STD 1553 decode display. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the MIL-STD 1553 serial decode option (Option 553) has been licensed. :SBUS:M1553:BASE? The :SBUS:M1553:BASE? query returns the current MIL- STD 1553 display decode base.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:MODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:MODE ::= {CAN | FLEXray | I2S | IIC | LIN | M1553 | SPI | UART} The :SBUS:MODE command determines the decode mode for the serial bus. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when a serial decode option has been licensed. :SBUS:MODE? The :SBUS:MODE? query returns the current serial bus decode mode setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:SPI:BITorder (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:SPI:BITorder ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} The :SBUS:SPI:BITorder command selects the bit order, most significant bit first (MSB) or least significant bit first (LSB), used when displaying data in the serial decode waveform and in the Lister. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the low-speed IIC and SPI serial decode option (Option LSS) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh ::= integer 4-16 in NR1 format The :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh command determines the number of bits in a word of data for SPI. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the low-speed IIC and SPI serial decode option (Option LSS) has been licensed. :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh? The :SBUS:SPI:WIDTh? query returns the current SPI decode word width.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:UART:BASE (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:UART:BASE ::= {ASCii | BINary | HEX} The :SBUS:UART:BASE command determines the base to use for the UART decode display. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed. :SBUS:UART:BASE? The :SBUS:UART:BASE? query returns the current UART decode base setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRor (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:UART:COUNt:ERRor? Returns the UART error frame count. NOTE Return Format This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RESet (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RESet Resets the UART frame counters. NOTE Errors See Also This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames? Returns the UART Rx frame count. NOTE Return Format This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames (see page 750) Query Syntax :SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames? Returns the UART Tx frame count. NOTE Return Format This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the UART/RS-232 triggering and serial decode option (Option 232) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SBUS:UART:FRAMing (see page 750) Command Syntax :SBUS:UART:FRAMing ::= {OFF | | } ::= 8-bit integer in decimal from 0-255 (0x00-0xff) ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary The :SBUS:UART:FRAMing command determines the byte value to use for framing (end of packet) or to turn off framing for UART decode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem Commands Control basic system functions of the oscilloscope. See "Introduction to :SYSTem Commands" on page 419. Table 67 :SYSTem Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :SYSTem:DATE (see page 420) :SYSTem:DATE? (see page 420) ::= ,, ::= 4-digit year in NR1 format ::= {1,..,12 | JANuary | FEBruary | MARch | APRil | MAY | JUNe | JULy | AUGust | SEPtember | OCTober | NOVember | DECember} ::= {1,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:DATE (see page 750) Command Syntax :SYSTem:DATE ::= ,, ::= 4-digit year in NR1 format ::= {1,..,12 | JANuary | FEBruary | MARch | APRil | MAY | JUNe | JULy | AUGust | SEPtember | OCTober | NOVember | DECember} ::= {1,..,31} The :SYSTem:DATE command sets the date. Validity checking is performed to ensure that the date is valid. Query Syntax :SYSTem:DATE? The SYSTem:DATE? query returns the date.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SYSTem:DSP (see page 750) Command Syntax :SYSTem:DSP ::= quoted ASCII string (up to 254 characters) The :SYSTem:DSP command writes the quoted string (excluding quotation marks) to a text box in the center of the display. Use :SYStem:DSP "" to remotely remove the message from the display. (Two sets of quote marks without a space between them creates a NULL string.) Press any menu key to manually remove the message from the display.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:ERRor (see page 750) Query Syntax :SYSTem:ERRor? The :SYSTem:ERRor? query outputs the next error number and text from the error queue. The instrument has an error queue that is 30 errors deep and operates on a first- in, first- out basis. Repeatedly sending the :SYSTem:ERRor? query returns the errors in the order that they occurred until the queue is empty. Any further queries then return zero until another error occurs.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SYSTem:LOCK (see page 750) Command Syntax :SYSTem:LOCK ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SYSTem:LOCK command disables the front panel. LOCK ON is the equivalent of sending a local lockout message over the programming interface. Query Syntax :SYSTem:LOCK? The :SYSTem:LOCK? query returns the lock status of the front panel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:PRECision (see page 750) Command Syntax :SYSTem:PRECision ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SYSTem:PRECision command turns the oscilloscope's precision analysis setting on or off. • OFF (0) — provides the maximum oscilloscope waveform update rate by performing measurements and math functions on a 1000- point measurement record.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK (see page 750) Command Syntax :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK command disables the fifty ohm impedance setting for all analog channels. Query Syntax :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK? The :SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK? query returns the analog channel protection lock status.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:SETup (see page 750) Command Syntax :SYSTem:SETup ::= binary block data in IEEE 488.2 # format. The :SYSTem:SETup command sets the oscilloscope as defined by the data in the setup (learn) string sent from the controller. The setup string does not change the interface mode or interface address. Query Syntax :SYSTem:SETup? The :SYSTem:SETup? query operates the same as the *LRN? query.
Commands by Subsystem 5 ' Write setup string back to oscilloscope using ":SYSTEM:SETUP" ' command: myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :SYSTem:TIME (see page 750) Command Syntax :SYSTem:TIME ::= hours,minutes,seconds in NR1 format The :SYSTem:TIME command sets the system time, using a 24- hour format. Commas are used as separators. Validity checking is performed to ensure that the time is valid. Query Syntax :SYSTem:TIME? The :SYSTem:TIME? query returns the current system time.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase Commands Control all horizontal sweep functions. See "Introduction to :TIMebase Commands" on page 429.
5 Commands by Subsystem Use :TIMebase? to query setup information for the TIMebase subsystem. Return Format The following is a sample response from the :TIMebase? query. In this case, the query was issued following a *RST command. :TIM:MODE MAIN;REF CENT;MAIN:RANG +1.00E-03;POS +0.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TIMebase:MODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:MODE ::= {MAIN | WINDow | XY | ROLL} The :TIMebase:MODE command sets the current time base. There are four time base modes: • MAIN — The normal time base mode is the main time base. It is the default time base mode after the *RST (Reset) command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:POSition (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:POSition ::= time in seconds from the trigger to the display reference in NR3 format The :TIMebase:POSition command sets the time interval between the trigger event and the display reference point on the screen. The display reference point is either left, right, or center and is set with the :TIMebase:REFerence command. The maximum position value depends on the time/division settings.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:RANGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:RANGe ::= 10 ns through 500 s in NR3 format The :TIMebase:RANGe command sets the full- scale horizontal time in seconds for the main window. The range is 10 times the current time- per- division setting. Query Syntax :TIMebase:RANGe? The :TIMebase:RANGe query returns the current full- scale range value for the main window.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:REFerence (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:REFerence ::= {LEFT | CENTer | RIGHt} The :TIMebase:REFerence command sets the time reference to one division from the left side of the screen, to the center of the screen, or to one division from the right side of the screen. Time reference is the point on the display where the trigger point is referenced.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TIMebase:SCALe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:SCALe ::= 1 ns through 50 s in NR3 format The :TIMebase:SCALe command sets the horizontal scale or units per division for the main window. Query Syntax :TIMebase:SCALe? The :TIMebase:SCALe? query returns the current horizontal scale setting in seconds per division for the main window.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:VERNier (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:VERNier ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF} The :TIMebase:VERNier command specifies whether the time base control's vernier (fine horizontal adjustment) setting is ON (1) or OFF (0). Query Syntax :TIMebase:VERNier? The :TIMebase:VERNier? query returns the current state of the time base control's vernier setting.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TIMebase:WINDow:POSition (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:WINDow:POSition ::= time from the trigger event to the zoomed (delayed) view reference point in NR3 format The :TIMebase:WINDow:POSition command sets the horizontal position in the zoomed (delayed) view of the main sweep. The main sweep range and the main sweep horizontal position determine the range for this command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe ::= range value in seconds in NR3 format The :TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe command sets the full- scale horizontal time in seconds for the zoomed (delayed) window. The range is 10 times the current zoomed view window seconds per division setting. The main sweep range determines the range for this command. The maximum value is one half of the :TIMebase:RANGe value.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe ::= scale value in seconds in NR3 format The :TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe command sets the zoomed (delayed) window horizontal scale (seconds/division). The main sweep scale determines the range for this command. The maximum value is one half of the :TIMebase:SCALe value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger Commands Control the trigger modes and parameters for each trigger type.
5 Commands by Subsystem The following trigger types are available (see ":TRIGger:MODE" on page 447). • CAN (Controller Area Network) triggering— will trigger on CAN version 2.0A and 2.0B signals. Setup consists of connecting the oscilloscope to a CAN signal. Baud rate, signal source, and signal polarity, and type of data to trigger on can be specified.
5 Commands by Subsystem • Sequence triggering— allows you to trigger the oscilloscope after finding a sequence of events. Defining a sequence trigger requires three steps: a Define the event to find before you trigger on the next event. This event can be a pattern, and edge from a single channel, or the combination of a pattern and a channel edge. b Define the trigger event.
5 Commands by Subsystem General :TRIGger Commands Table 69 General :TRIGger Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:HFReject {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} (see page 444) :TRIGger:HFReject? (see page 444) {0 | 1} :TRIGger:HOLDoff (see page 445) :TRIGger:HOLDoff? (see page 445) ::= 60 ns to 10 s in NR3 format :TRIGger:LFIFty (see page 446) n/a n/a :TRIGger:MODE (see page 447) :TRIGger:MODE? (see page 447) ::= {EDGE | GLITch | PATTe
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:HFReject (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:HFReject ::= {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} The :TRIGger:HFReject command turns the high frequency reject filter off and on. The high frequency reject filter adds a 50 kHz low- pass filter in the trigger path to remove high frequency components from the trigger waveform. Use this filter to remove high- frequency noise, such as AM or FM broadcast stations, from the trigger path.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:HOLDoff (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:HOLDoff ::= 60 ns to 10 s in NR3 format The :TRIGger:HOLDoff command defines the holdoff time value in seconds. Holdoff keeps a trigger from occurring until after a certain amount of time has passed since the last trigger. This feature is valuable when a waveform crosses the trigger level multiple times during one period of the waveform.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LFIFty (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LFIFty The :TRIGger:LFIFty command sets the trigger level of a displayed analog channel trigger source to the waveform's 50% value.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:MODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:MODE ::= {EDGE | GLITch | PATTern | CAN | DURation | I2S |IIC | EBURst | LIN | M1553| SEQuence | SPI | TV | UART | USB | FLEXray} The :TRIGger:MODE command selects the trigger mode (trigger type). Query Syntax :TRIGger:MODE? The :TRIGger:MODE? query returns the current trigger mode. If the :TIMebase:MODE is ROLL or XY, the query returns "NONE".
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:NREJect (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:NREJect ::= {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} The :TRIGger:NREJect command turns the noise reject filter off and on. When the noise reject filter is on, the trigger circuitry is less sensitive to noise but may require a greater amplitude waveform to trigger the oscilloscope. This command is not valid in TV trigger mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:PATTern (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:PATTern ::= , [, , ] ::= integer in NR1 format or ::= integer in NR1 format or ::= "0xnn"; n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":TRIGger:MODE" on page 447 450 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SWEep (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SWEep ::= {AUTO | NORMal} The :TRIGger:SWEep command selects the trigger sweep mode. When AUTO sweep mode is selected, a baseline is displayed in the absence of a signal. If a signal is present but the oscilloscope is not triggered, the unsynchronized signal is displayed instead of a baseline.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN Commands Table 70 :TRIGger:CAN Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern: DATA , (see page 454) :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern: DATA? (see page 454) ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or (with Option AMS) ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 70 :TRIGger:CAN Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:D EFinition (see page 460) :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:D EFinition? (see page 460) ::= {CANH | CANL | RX | TX | DIFFerential | DIFL | DIFH} :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce (see page 461) :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce? (see page 461) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger (see page 462) :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGge
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA , ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= 64-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth ::= integer from 1 to 8 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth command sets the number of 8- bit bytes in the CAN data string. The number of bytes in the string can be anywhere from 0 bytes to 8 bytes (64 bits). The value for these bytes is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID , ::= 32-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= 32-bit integer in decimal, , or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE ::= {STANdard | EXTended} The :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE command sets the CAN identifier mode. STANdard selects the standard 11- bit identifier. EXTended selects the extended 29- bit identifier. The CAN identifier is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:SAMPlepoint (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:SAMPlepoint ::= {60 | 62.5 | 68 | 70 | 75 | 80 | 87.5} in NR3 format The :TRIGger:CAN:SAMPlepoint command sets the point during the bit time where the bit level is sampled to determine whether the bit is dominant or recessive. The sample point represents the percentage of time between the beginning of the bit time to the end of the bit time.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate ::= integer from 10000 to 1000000 in 100 b/s increments The :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate command sets the standard baud rate of the CAN signal from 10 kb/s to 1 Mb/s in 100 b/s increments. If you enter a baud rate that is not divisible by 100 b/s, the baud rate is set to the nearest baud rate divisible by 100 b/s.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:DEFinition (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:DEFinition ::= {CANH | CANL | RX | TX | DIFFerential | DIFL | DIFH} The :TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:DEFinition command sets the CAN signal type when :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger is set to SOF (start of frame). These signals can be set to: Dominant high signal: • CANH — the actual CAN_H differential bus signal.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:CAN:SOURce command sets the source for the CAN signal. The source setting is only valid when :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger is set to SOF (start of frame).
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger ::= {SOF | DATA | ERRor | IDData | IDEither | IDRemote | ALLerrors | OVERload | ACKerror} The :TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger command sets the CAN trigger on condition: • SOF - will trigger on the Start of Frame (SOF) bit of a Data frame, Remote Transfer Request (RTR) frame, or an Overload frame.
5 Commands by Subsystem CAN Id specification is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID and:TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:ID:MODE commands. CAN Data specification is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA command. CAN Data Length Code is set by the :TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth command. NOTE Query Syntax SOF is the only valid selection for analog oscilloscopes. If the automotive CAN and LIN serial decode option (Option AMS) has not been licensed, SOF is the only valid selection.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation Commands Table 71 :TRIGger:DURation Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:DURation:GRE aterthan [suffix] (see page 465) :TRIGger:DURation:GRE aterthan? (see page 465) ::= floating-point number in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} :TRIGger:DURation:LES Sthan [suffix] (see page 466) :TRIGger:DURation:LES Sthan? (see page 466) ::= floating-point n
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan [] ::= minimum trigger duration in seconds in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps } The :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan command sets the minimum duration for the defined pattern when :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier is set to GREaterthan. The command also sets the timeout value when the :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier is set to TIMeout.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan [] ::= maximum trigger duration in seconds in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan command sets the maximum duration for the defined pattern when :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier is set to LESSthan.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation:PATTern (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:PATTern , ::= integer or ::= integer or ::= "0xnnnnnn"; n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:DURation:PATTern command defines the specified duration pattern resource according to the value and the mask. For both and , each bit corresponds to a possible trigger channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier ::= {GREaterthan | LESSthan | INRange | OUTRange | TIMeout} The :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier command qualifies the trigger duration. Set the GREaterthan qualifier value with the :TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan command. Set the LESSthan qualifier value with the :TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:DURation:RANGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:DURation:RANGe [], [] ::= 10 ns to 9.99 seconds in NR3 format ::= 15 ns to 10 seconds in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:DURation:RANGe command sets the duration for the defined pattern when the :TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier command is set to INRange or OUTRange.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:EBURst Commands Table 72 :TRIGger:EBURst Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt (see page 471) :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt ? (see page 471) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE (see page 472) :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE? (see page 472) ::= time in seconds in NR3 format :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe (see page 473) :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe ? (see page 473) ::= {NEGative | POSitive}
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt ::= integer in NR1 format The :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt command sets the Nth edge at burst counter resource. The edge counter is used in the trigger stage to determine which edge in a burst will generate a trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt? The :TRIGger:EBURst:COUNt? query returns the current Nth edge of burst edge counter setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE ::= time in seconds in NR3 format The :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE command sets the Nth edge in a burst idle resource in seconds from 10 ns to 10 s. The timer is used to set the minimum time before the next burst. Query Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE? The :TRIGger:EBURst:IDLE? query returns current Nth edge in a burst idle setting.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe ::= {NEGative | POSitive} The :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe command specifies whether the rising edge (POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative) of the Nth edge in a burst will generate a trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe? The :TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe? query returns the current Nth edge in a burst slope.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE] Commands Table 73 :TRIGger[:EDGE] Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPl ing {AC | DC | LF} (see page 475) :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPl ing? (see page 475) {AC | DC | LF} :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel [,] (see page 476) :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel ? [] (see page 476) For internal triggers, ::= .75 x full-scale voltage from center screen in NR3 format.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling ::= {AC | DC | LFReject} The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling command sets the input coupling for the selected trigger sources. The coupling can be set to AC, DC, or LFReject. • AC coupling places a high- pass filter (10 Hz for analog channels, and 3.5 Hz for all External trigger inputs) in the trigger path, removing dc offset voltage from the trigger waveform.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel ::= [,] ::= 0.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect ::= {OFF | LFReject | HFReject} The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect command turns the low- frequency or high- frequency reject filter on or off. You can turn on one of these filters at a time. • The high frequency reject filter adds a 50 kHz low- pass filter in the trigger path to remove high frequency components from the trigger waveform.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe ::= {NEGative | POSitive | ALTernate} The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe command specifies the slope of the edge for the trigger. The SLOPe command is not valid in TV trigger mode. Instead, use :TRIGger:TV:POLarity to set the polarity in TV trigger mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe? The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe? query returns the current trigger slope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal | LINE} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce command selects the channel that produces the trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce? The :TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce? query returns the current source. If all channels are off, the query returns "NONE.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray Commands Table 74 :TRIGger:FLEXray Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTo setup (see page 481) n/a n/a :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUD rate (see page 482) :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUD rate? (see page 482) ::= {2500000 | 5000000 | 10000000} :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHAN nel (see page 483) :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHAN nel? (see page 483) ::= {A | B} :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRo r:TYPE (see page 484)
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTosetup (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTosetup The :TRIGger:FLEXray:AUTosetup command automatically configures oscilloscope settings to facilitate FlexRay triggering and serial decode. • Sets the selected source channel's impedance to 50 Ohms. • Sets the selected source channel' s probe attenuation to 10:1. • Sets the trigger level (on the selected source channel) to - 300 mV. • Turns on trigger Noise Reject. • Turns on Serial Decode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate ::= {2500000 | 5000000 | 10000000} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate command specifies the baud rate as 2.5 Mb/s, 5 Mb/s, or 10 Mb/s. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the FlexRay triggering and serial decode option (Option FLX) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel ::= {A | B} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel command specifies the bus channel, A or B, of the FlexRay signal. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid on 4 (analog) channel oscilloscope models when the FlexRay triggering and serial decode option (Option FLX) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRor:TYPE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:ERRor:TYPE ::= {ALL | HCRC | FCRC} Selects the FlexRay error type to trigger on. The error type setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to ERRor. • ALL — triggers on ALL errors. • HCRC — triggers on only Header CRC errors. • FCRC — triggers on only Frame CRC errors.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:EVENt:TYPE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:EVENt:TYPE ::= {WAKeup | TSS | {FES | DTS} | BSS} Selects the FlexRay event to trigger on. The event setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to EVENt. • WAKeup — triggers on Wake- Up event. • TSS — triggers on Transmission Start Sequence event. • FES — triggers on Frame End Sequence event. • DTS — triggers on Dynamic Trailing Sequence event.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCBase (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCBase ::= integer from 0-63 The :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCBase command sets the base of the FlexRay cycle count (in the frame header) to trigger on. The cycle count base setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to FRAME.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCRepetition (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCRepetition ::= {ALL | } ::= integer from 2-64 The :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:CCRepetition command sets the repetition number of the FlexRay cycle count (in the frame header) to trigger on. The cycle count repetition setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to FRAME.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:ID (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:ID ::= {ALL | } ::= integer from 1-2047 The :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:ID command sets the FlexRay frame ID to trigger on . The frame IF setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to FRAME. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid when the FLEXray triggering and serial decode option (Option FLX) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE ::= {NORMal | STARtup | NULL | SYNC | NSTArtup | NNULl | NSYNc | ALL} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:FRAMe:TYPE command sets the FlexRay frame type to trigger on. The frame type setting is only valid when the FlexRay trigger mode is set to FRAME. • NORMal — will trigger on only normal (NSTArtup & NNULl & NSYNc) frames. • STARtup — will trigger on only startup frames.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce ::= {CHANnel} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce command specifies the input source for the FlexRay signal. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid when the FLEXray triggering and serial decode option (Option FLX) has been licensed. :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce? The :TRIGger:FLEXray:SOURce? query returns the current source for the FlexRay signal.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger ::= {FRAMe | ERRor | EVENt} The :TRIGger:FLEXray:TRIGger command sets the FLEXray trigger on condition: • FRAMe — triggers on specified frames (without errors). • ERRor — triggers on selected active error frames and unknown bus conditions. • EVENt — triggers on specified FlexRay event/symbol.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch Commands Table 75 :TRIGger:GLITch Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:GLITch:GREat erthan [s uffix] (see page 493) :TRIGger:GLITch:GREat erthan? (see page 493) ::= floating-point number in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSt han [suff ix] (see page 494) :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSt han? (see page 494) ::= floating-point number in N
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:GLITch:GREaterthan (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:GREaterthan [] ::= floating-point number in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:GLITch:GREaterthan command sets the minimum pulse width duration for the selected :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan [] ::= floating-point number in NR3 format ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan command sets the maximum pulse width duration for the selected :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce. Query Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan? The :TRIGger:GLITch:LESSthan? query returns the pulse width duration time for :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:LEVel (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:LEVel ::= [, ] ::= .
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity ::= {POSitive | NEGative} The :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity command sets the polarity for the glitch pulse width trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity? The :TRIGger:GLITch:POLarity? query returns the glitch pulse width trigger polarity.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier ::= {GREaterthan | LESSthan | RANGe} This command sets the mode of operation of the glitch pulse width trigger. The oscilloscope can trigger on a pulse width that is greater than a time value, less than a time value, or within a range of time values. Query Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier? The :TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier? query returns the glitch pulse width qualifier.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe [suffix], [suffix] ::= (15 ns - 10 seconds) in NR3 format ::= (10 ns - 9.99 seconds) in NR3 format [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :TRIGger:GLITch:RANGe command sets the pulse width duration for the selected :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce command selects the channel that produces the pulse width trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce? The :TRIGger:GLITch:SOURce? query returns the current pulse width source.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S Commands Table 76 :TRIGger:I2S Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnmen t (see page 502) :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnmen t? (see page 502) ::= {I2S | LJ | RJ} :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio (see page 503) :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio? (see page 503) ::= {RIGHt | LEFT | EITHer} :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SL OPe (see page 504) :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SL OPe? (see page 504) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} :TRIGger:I
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 76 :TRIGger:I2S Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:D ATA (see page 512) :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:D ATA? (see page 512) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:W SELect (see page 513) :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:W SELect? (see page 513) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger (see page 514) :TRIGger
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment ::= {I2S | LJ | RJ} The :TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment command selects the data alignment of the I2S bus for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in I2S mode: • I2S — standard. • LJ — left justified. • RJ — right justified. Note that the word select (WS) polarity is specified separately with the :TRIGger:I2S:WSHigh command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio ::= {RIGHt | LEFT | EITHer} The :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio command specifies the audio channel to trigger on: • RIGHt — right channel. • LEFT— left channel. • EITHer — right channel. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio? The :TRIGger:I2S:AUDio? query returns the current audio channel for the I2S trigger.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe ::= {NEGative | POSitive} The :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe command specifies which edge of the I2S serial clock signal clocks in data. • NEGative — Falling edge. • POSitive — Rising edge. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe? The :TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe? query returns the current I2S clock slope setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA ::= "n" where n ::= 32-bit integer in signed decimal when = DECimal ::= "nn...n" where n ::= {0 | 1 | X | $} when = BINary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F | X | $} when = HEX NOTE is specified with the :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat command. The default is DECimal.
5 Commands by Subsystem NOTE Query Syntax If more bits are sent for than the specified trigger data length, the most significant bits will be truncated. If the word size is changed after the is programmed, the added or deleted bits will be added to or deleted from the least significant bits. :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA? The :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA? query returns the currently specified I2S trigger data pattern.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat ::= {BINary | HEX | DECimal} The :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat command sets the entry (and query) number base used by the :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA command. The default is DECimal. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat? The :TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat? query returns the currently set number base for I2S pattern data.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:RANGe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:RANGe , ::= 32-bit integer in signed decimal, , or ::= 32-bit integer in signed decimal, or ::= #Hnn...n where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
Commands by Subsystem 5 • ":TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger" on page 514 • ":TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth" on page 510 • ":TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth" on page 516 • ":TRIGger:I2S:WSLow" on page 517 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 509
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth ::= 4-32 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth command sets the width of the receiver (decoded) data word in I2S anywhere from 4 bits to 32 bits. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth? The :TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth? query returns the currently set I2S receiver data word width.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:CLOCk (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:CLOCk ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:CLOCk controls which signal is used as the serial clock (SCLK) source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in I2S mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:DATA ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:DATA command controls which signal is used as the serial data (SDATA) source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in I2S mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:WSELect (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:WSELect ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:WSELect command controls which signal is used as the word select (WS) source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in I2S mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger ::= {EQUal | NOTequal | LESSthan | GREaterthan | INRange | OUTRange | INCReasing | DECReasing} The :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger command sets the I2S trigger operator: • EQUal— triggers on the specified audio channel's data word when it equals the specified word. • NOTequal — triggers on any word other than the specified word.
5 Commands by Subsystem The :TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger? query returns the current I2S trigger operator.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth ::= 4-32 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth command sets the width of the transmitted data word in I2S anywhere from 4 bits to 32 bits. Query Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth? The :TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth? query returns the currently set I2S transmitted data word width.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:I2S:WSLow (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:I2S:WSLow ::= {LEFT | RIGHt} The :TRIGger:I2S:WSLow command selects the polarity of the word select (WS) signal: • LEFT— a word select (WS) state of low indicates left channel data is active on the I2S bus, and a WS state of high indicates right channel data is active on the bus.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC Commands Table 77 :TRIGger:IIC Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern: ADDRess (see page 519) :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern: ADDRess? (see page 519) ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern: DATA (see page 520) :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern: DATA? (see page 520) ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess command sets the address for IIC data.The address can range from 0x00 to 0x7F (7- bit) or 0x3FF (10- bit) hexadecimal. Use the don't care address (- 1 or 0xFFFFFFFF) to ignore the address value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA command sets IIC data. The data value can range from 0x00 to 0x0FF (hexadecimal). Use the don't care data pattern (- 1 or 0xFFFFFFFF) to ignore the data value. Query Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA? The :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA? query returns the current pattern for IIC data.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2 (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2 ::= integer or ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2 command sets IIC data 2. The data value can range from 0x00 to 0x0FF (hexadecimal). Use the don't care data pattern (- 1 or 0xFFFFFFFF) to ignore the data value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:CLOCk (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]CLOCk ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]CLOCk command sets the source for the IIC serial clock (SCL). Query Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]CLOCk? The :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]CLOCk? query returns the current source for the IIC serial clock.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]DATA ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]DATA command sets the source for IIC serial data (SDA). Query Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]DATA? The :TRIGger:IIC:[SOURce:]DATA? query returns the current source for IIC serial data.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier ::= {EQUal | NOTequal | LESSthan | GREaterthan} The :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier command sets the IIC data qualifier when TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] is set to READEprom. Query Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier? The :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier? query returns the current IIC data qualifier value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] ::= {STARt | STOP | READ7 | READEprom | WRITe7 | WRITe10 | NACKnowledge | ANACknowledge | R7Data2 | W7Data2 | RESTart} The :TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger[:TYPE] command sets the IIC trigger type: • STARt — Start condition. • STOP — Stop condition. • READ7 — 7- bit address frame containing (Start:Address7:Read:Ack:Data). The value READ is also accepted for READ7.
5 Commands by Subsystem • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess" on page 519 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA" on page 520 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2" on page 521 • ":TRIGger:IIC:TRIGger:QUALifier" on page 524 • "Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules" on page 752 526 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN Commands Table 78 :TRIGger:LIN Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:LIN:ID (see page 529) :TRIGger:LIN:ID? (see page 529) ::= 7-bit integer in decimal, , or from 0-63 or 0x00-0x3f (with Option AMS) ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 78 :TRIGger:LIN Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbrea k (see page 538) :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbrea k? (see page 538) ::= integer = {11 | 12 | 13} :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger (see page 539) :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger? (see page 539) ::= {SYNCbreak} (without Option AMS) ::= {SYNCbreak | ID | DATA} (with Option AMS) 528 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guid
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:ID (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:ID ::= 7-bit integer in decimal, , or from 0-63 or 0x00-0x3f ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...n where n ::= {0 | 1} for binary ::= "0xnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal The :TRIGger:LIN:ID command defines the LIN identifier searched for in each CAN message when the LIN trigger mode is set to frame ID.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA ::= "n" where n ::= 32-bit integer in signed decimal when = DECimal ::= "nn...n" where n ::= {0 | 1 | X | $} when = BINary ::= "0xnn...n" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F | X | $} when = HEX NOTE is specified with the :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat command. The default is DECimal.
Commands by Subsystem Query Syntax 5 :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA? The :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA? query returns the currently specified LIN trigger data pattern.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth ::= integer from 1 to 8 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth command sets the number of 8- bit bytes in the LIN data string. The number of bytes in the string can be anywhere from 0 bytes to 8 bytes (64 bits). The value for these bytes is set by the :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat ::= {BINary | HEX | DECimal} The :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat command sets the entry (and query) number base used by the :TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA command. The default is DECimal. NOTE Query Syntax This command is only valid when the automotive CAN and LIN serial decode option (Option AMS) has been licensed.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint ::= {60 | 62.5 | 68 | 70 | 75 | 80 | 87.5} in NR3 format The :TRIGger:LIN:SAMPlepoint command sets the point during the bit time where the bit level is sampled to determine whether the bit is dominant or recessive. The sample point represents the percentage of time between the beginning of the bit time to the end of the bit time.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate ::= integer from 2400 to 625000 in 100 b/s increments The :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate command sets the standard baud rate of the LIN signal from 2400 b/s to 625 kb/s in 100 b/s increments. If you enter a baud rate that is not divisible by 100 b/s, the baud rate is set to the nearest baud rate divisible by 100 b/s.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce command sets the source for the LIN signal. Query Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce? The :TRIGger:LIN:SOURce? query returns the current source for the LIN signal.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard ::= {LIN13 | LIN20} The :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard command sets the LIN standard in effect for triggering and decoding to be LIN1.3 or LIN2.0. Query Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard? The :TRIGger:LIN:STANdard? query returns the current LIN standard setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbreak (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbreak ::= integer = {11 | 12 | 13} The :TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbreak command sets the length of the LIN sync break to be greater than or equal to 11, 12, or 13 clock lengths. The sync break is the idle period in the bus activity at the beginning of each packet that distinguishes one information packet from the previous one.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger ::= {SYNCbreak | ID | DATA} The :TRIGger:LIN:TRIGger command sets the LIN trigger condition to be: • SYNCbreak — Sync Break. • ID — Frame ID. Use the :TRIGger:LIN:ID command to specify the frame ID. • DATA — Frame ID and Data. Use the :TRIGger:LIN:ID command to specify the frame ID.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:M1553 Commands Table 79 :TRIGger:M1553 Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:M1553:AUTose tup (see page 541) n/a n/a :TRIGger:M1553:PATTer n:DATA (see page 542) :TRIGger:M1553:PATTer n:DATA? (see page 542) ::= "nn...
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:M1553:AUTosetup (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:AUTosetup The :TRIGger:M1553:AUTosetup command copies the position, volts/div, and probe attenuation from the upper threshold channel to the lower threshold channel, sets the upper/lower trigger levels to +/- 500 mV, turns on serial decode, and sets the trigger mode to M1553.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA ::= "nn...n" where n ::= {0 | 1 | X} The :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA command sets the 11 bits to trigger on if the trigger type has been set to RTA11 (RTA + 11 Bits) using the :TRIG:M1553:TYPE command. Query Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA? The :TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA? query returns the current 11- bit setting. Return Format ::= "nn...
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:M1553:RTA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:RTA ::= 5-bit integer in decimal, , or from 0-31 ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9|A,..,F} ::= "0xnn" where n::= {0,..,9|A,..,F} The :TRIGger:M1553:RTA command sets the Remote Terminal Address (RTA) to trigger on if the trigger type has been set to RTA using the :TRIG:M1553:TYPE command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer ::= {CHANnel} ::= {2 | 4} The :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer command controls which signal is used as the Lower Threshold Channel source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in MIL- 1553 mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer? The :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:LOWer? query returns the currently set Lower Threshold Channel source.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer ::= {CHANnel} ::= {1 | 3} The :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer command controls which signal is used as the Upper Threshold Channel source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in MIL- 1553 mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer? The :TRIGger:M1553:SOURce:UPPer? query returns the currently set Upper Threshold Channel source.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:M1553:TYPE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:M1553:TYPE ::= {DSTArt | DSTOp | CSTArt | CSTOp | RTA | PERRor | SERRor | MERRor | RTA11} The :TRIGger:M1553:TYPE command specifies the type of MIL- STD 1553 trigger to be used: • DSTArt — (Data Word Start) triggers on the start of a Data word (at the end of a valid Data Sync pulse). • DSTOp — (Data Word Stop) triggers on the end of a Data word.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence Commands Table 80 :TRIGger:SEQuence Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:SEQuence:COU Nt (see page 548) :TRIGger:SEQuence:COU Nt? (see page 548) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDG E{1|2} , (see page 549) :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDG E{1|2}? (see page 549) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {POSitive | NEGative} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format ::= query returns
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt ::= integer in NR1 format The :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt command sets the sequencer edge counter resource. The edge counter is used in the trigger stage to determine the number of edges that must be found before the sequencer generates a trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt? The :TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt? query returns the current sequencer edge counter setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE{1 | 2} , ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {POSitive | NEGative} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE command defines the specified sequencer edge resource according to the specified and . To disable an edge resource, set its to NONE.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND ::= {PATTern1,ENTered | PATTern1,EXITed | EDGE1 | PATTern1,AND,EDGE1} The :TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND command specifies the find stage of a sequence trigger. This command accepts three program data parameters; you can use NONE to fill out the parameter list (for example,"EDGE1,NONE,NONE"). PATTern1 is specified with the":TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern{1 | 2} , ::= integer or ::= integer or ::= "0xnnnnnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern command defines the specified sequence pattern resource according to the value and the mask. For both and , each bit corresponds to a possible trigger channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet ::= {NONE | PATTern1,ENTered | PATTern1,EXITed | EDGE1 | PATTern1,AND,EDGE1 | PATTern2,ENTered | PATTern2,EXITed | EDGE2 | TIMer} Values used in find and trigger stages are not available. not available if EDGE2,COUNt is used in trigger stage. EDGE2 is The :TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet command specifies the reset stage of a sequence trigger.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer ::= time in seconds in NR1 format The :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer command sets the sequencer timer resource in seconds from 10 ns to 10 s. The timer is used in the reset stage to determine how long to wait for the trigger to occur before restarting. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer? The :TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer? query returns current sequencer timer setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger ::={PATTern2,ENTered | PATTern2,EXITed | EDGE2 | PATTern2,AND,EDGE2 | EDGE2,COUNt | EDGE2,COUNt,NREFind} The :TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger command specifies the trigger stage of a sequence trigger. The sequence commands set various search terms. After all of these are found in sequence, the trigger condition itself is searched for.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI Commands Table 81 :TRIGger:SPI Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SL OPe (see page 556) :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SL OPe? (see page 556) ::= {NEGative | POSitive} :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TI Meout (see page 557) :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TI Meout? (see page 557) ::= time in seconds in NR1 format :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing (see page 558) :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing? (see page 558) ::= {CHIPsele
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe ::= {NEGative | POSitive} The :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe command specifies the rising edge (POSitive) or falling edge (NEGative) of the SPI clock source that will clock in the data. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe? The :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe? query returns the current SPI clock source slope.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout ::= time in seconds in NR1 format The :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout command sets the SPI signal clock timeout resource in seconds from 500 ns to 10 s when the :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing command is set to TIMeout. The timer is used to frame a signal by a clock timeout.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing ::= {CHIPselect | NOTChipselect | TIMeout} The :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing command sets the SPI trigger framing value. If TIMeout is selected, the timeout value is set by the :TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout command. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing? The :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing? query returns the current SPI framing value.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA , ::= integer or ::= integer or ::= "0xnnnnnn" where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} The :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA command defines the SPI data pattern resource according to the value and the mask. This pattern, along with the data width, control the data pattern searched for in the data stream.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh ::= integer from 4 to 32 in NR1 format The :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh command sets the width of the SPI data pattern anywhere from 4 bits to 32 bits. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh? The :TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh? query returns the current SPI data pattern width setting.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk command sets the source for the SPI serial clock. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk? The :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:CLOCk? query returns the current source for the SPI serial clock.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA command sets the source for the SPI serial data. Query Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA? The :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA? query returns the current source for the SPI serial data.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe command sets the frame source when :TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing is set to CHIPselect or NOTChipselect.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV Commands Table 82 :TRIGger:TV Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:TV:LINE (see page 565) :TRIGger:TV:LINE? (see page 565) ::= integer in NR1 format :TRIGger:TV:MODE (see page 566) :TRIGger:TV:MODE? (see page 566) ::= {FIEld1 | FIEld2 | AFIelds | ALINes | LINE | VERTical | LFIeld1 | LFIeld2 | LALTernate | LVERtical} :TRIGger:TV:POLarity (see page 567) :TRIGger:TV:POLarity?
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV:LINE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:LINE ::= integer in NR1 format The :TRIGger:TV:LINE command allows triggering on a specific line of video. The line number limits vary with the standard and mode, as shown in the following table.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV:MODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:MODE ::= {FIEld1 | FIEld2 | AFIelds | ALINes | LINE | VERTical | LFIeld1 | LFIeld2 | LALTernate | LVERtical} The :TRIGger:TV:MODE command selects the TV trigger mode and field. The LVERtical parameter is only available when :TRIGger:TV:STANdard is GENeric. The LALTernate parameter is not available when :TRIGger:TV:STANdard is GENeric.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:TV:POLarity (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:POLarity ::= {POSitive | NEGative} The :TRIGger:TV:POLarity command sets the polarity for the TV trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:TV:POLarity? The :TRIGger:TV:POLarity? query returns the TV trigger polarity.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:SOURce ::= {CHANnel} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:TV:SOURce command selects the channel used to produce the trigger. Query Syntax :TRIGger:TV:SOURce? The :TRIGger:TV:SOURce? query returns the current TV trigger source.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:TV:STANdard (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:STANdard ::= {GENeric | NTSC | PALM | PAL | SECam | {P480L60HZ | P480} | {P720L60HZ | P720} | {P1080L24HZ | P1080} | P1080L25HZ | P1080L50HZ | P1080L60HZ | {I1080L50HZ | I1080} | I1080L60HZ} The :TRIGger:TV:STANdard command selects the video standard. GENeric mode is non- interlaced.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART Commands Table 84 :TRIGger:UART Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:UART:BASE (see page 572) :TRIGger:UART:BASE? (see page 572) ::= {ASCii | HEX} :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrat e (see page 573) :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrat e? (see page 573) ::= integer from 1200 to 3000000 in 100 b/s increments :TRIGger:UART:BITorde r (see page 574) :TRIGger:UART:BITorde r? (see page 574) ::= {LSBFirst
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 84 :TRIGger:UART Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:UART:SOURce: TX (see page 582) :TRIGger:UART:SOURce: TX? (see page 582) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:UART:TYPE (see page 583) :TRIGger:UART:TYPE? (see page 583) ::= RDATa | RD1 PARityerror TDATa | TD1 :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh (see page 584) :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh? (see page 584) ::= {5 | 6
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:BASE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BASE ::= {ASCii | HEX} The :TRIGger:UART:BASE command sets the front panel UART/RS232 trigger setup data selection option: • ASCii — front panel data selection is from ASCII values. • HEX — front panel data selection is from hexadecimal values. The :TRIGger:UART:BASE setting does not affect the :TRIGger:UART:DATA command which can always set data values using ASCII or hexadecimal values.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate ::= integer from 1200 to 3000000 in 100 b/s increments The :TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate command selects the bit rate (in bps) for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. The baud rate can be set from 1200 b/s to 3 Mb/s in 100 b/s increments. If you enter a baud rate that is not divisible by 100 b/s, the baud rate is set to the nearest baud rate divisible by 100 b/s.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:BITorder (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BITorder ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} The :TRIGger:UART:BITorder command specifies the order of transmission used by the physical Tx and Rx input signals for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. LSBFirst sets the least significant bit of each message "byte" as transmitted first. MSBFirst sets the most significant bit as transmitted first.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:BURSt (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BURSt ::= {OFF | 1 to 4096 in NR1 format} The :TRIGger:UART:BURSt command selects the burst value (Nth frame after idle period) in the range 1 to 4096 or OFF, for the trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:BURSt? The :TRIGger:UART:BURSt? query returns the current UART trigger burst value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:DATA (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:DATA ::= 8-bit integer from 0-255 (0x00-0xff) in decimal, , , or format ::= #Hnn where n ::= {0,..,9 | A,..,F} for hexadecimal ::= #Bnn...
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:UART:IDLE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:IDLE ::= time from 1 us to 10 s in NR3 format The :TRIGger:UART:IDLE command selects the value of the idle period for burst trigger in the range from 1 us to 10 s when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:IDLE? The :TRIGger:UART:IDLE? query returns the current UART trigger idle period time.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:PARity (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:PARity ::= {EVEN | ODD | NONE} The :TRIGger:UART:PARity command selects the parity to be used with each message "byte" for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:PARity? The :TRIGger:UART:PARity? query returns the current UART parity setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:POLarity (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:POLarity ::= {HIGH | LOW} The :TRIGger:UART:POLarity command selects the polarity as idle low or idle high for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:POLarity? The :TRIGger:UART:POLarity? query returns the current UART polarity setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier ::= {EQUal | NOTequal | GREaterthan | LESSthan} The :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier command selects the data qualifier when :TYPE is set to RDATa, RD1, RD0, RDX, TDATa, TD1, TD0, or TDX for the trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier? The :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier? query returns the current UART trigger qualifier.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX command controls which signal is used as the Rx source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX command controls which signal is used as the Tx source by the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:UART:TYPE (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:TYPE ::= {RSTArt | RSTOp | RDATa | RD1 | RD0 | RDX | PARityerror | TSTArt | TSTOp | TDATa | TD1 | TD0 | TDX} The :TRIGger:UART:TYPE command selects the UART trigger type. When one of the RD or TD types is selected, the :TRIGger:UART:DATA and :TRIGger:UART:QUALifier commands are used to specify the data value and comparison operator.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh ::= {5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9} The :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh command determines the number of bits (5- 9) for each message "byte" for the serial decoder and/or trigger when in UART mode. Query Syntax :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh? The :TRIGger:UART:WIDTh? query returns the current UART width setting.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:USB Commands Table 85 :TRIGger:USB Commands Summary Command Query Options and Query Returns :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:D MINus (see page 586) :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:D MINus? (see page 586) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:D PLus (see page 587) :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:D PLus? (see page 587) ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= 1-2 or 1-4 in NR1 format :TRIGger:USB:SPEed (see page 588) :TR
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus command sets the source for the USB D- signal. Query Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus? The :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus? query returns the current source for the USB D- signal.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus ::= {CHANnel | EXTernal} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus command sets the source for the USB D+ signal. Query Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus? The :TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus? query returns the current source for the USB D+ signal.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:USB:SPEed (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SPEed ::= {LOW | FULL} The :TRIGger:USB:SPEed command sets the expected USB signal speed to be Low Speed (1.5 Mb/s) or Full Speed (12 Mb/s). Query Syntax :TRIGger:USB:SPEed? The :TRIGger:USB:SPEed? query returns the current speed value for the USB signal.
5 Commands by Subsystem :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger ::= {SOP | EOP | ENTersuspend | EXITsuspend | RESet} The :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger command sets where the USB trigger will occur: • SOP — Start of packet. • EOP — End of packet. • ENTersuspend — Enter suspend state. • EXITsuspend — Exit suspend state. • RESet — Reset complete. Query Syntax :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger? The :TRIGger:USB:TRIGger? query returns the current USB trigger value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform Commands Provide access to waveform data. See "Introduction to :WAVeform Commands" on page 592.
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 86 :WAVeform Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :WAVeform:PREamble? (see page 606) ::= , ,,, , , ,, , ::= an integer in NR1 format: • 0 for BYTE format • 1 for WORD format • 2 for ASCii format ::= an integer in NR1 format: • • • • 0 1 2 3 for for for for NORMal ty
5 Commands by Subsystem Table 86 :WAVeform Commands Summary (continued) Command Query Options and Query Returns n/a :WAVeform:XORigin? (see page 620) ::= x-origin value in the current preamble in NR3 format n/a :WAVeform:XREFerence? (see page 621) ::= 0 (x-reference value in the current preamble in NR1 format) n/a :WAVeform:YINCrement? (see page 622) ::= y-increment value in the current preamble in NR3 format n/a :WAVeform:YORigin? (see page 623)
5 Commands by Subsystem Once you have acquired data with the :DIGitize command, the instrument is stopped. If the instrument is restarted (via the programming interface or the front panel), or if any instrument setting is changed, the data acquired with the :DIGitize command may be overwritten.You should first acquire the data with the :DIGitize command, then immediately read the data with the :WAVeform:DATA? query (see page 599) before changing any instrument setup.
5 Commands by Subsystem AVERage Data AVERage data consists of the average of the first n hits in a time bucket, where n is the value returned by the :ACQuire:COUNt query (see page 181). Time buckets that have fewer than n hits return the average of the data they do have. If a time bucket does not have any data in it, it returns 0.
Commands by Subsystem 5 voltage = [(data value - yreference) * yincrement] + yorigin If the :WAVeform:FORMat data format is ASCii (see page 601), the data values are converted internally and sent as floating point values separated by commas. In converting a data value to time, the time value of a data point can be determined by the position of the data point.
5 Commands by Subsystem The setting of :WAVeform:BYTeorder (see page 597) and :WAVeform:UNSigned (see page 617) have no effect when the format is ASCii. Data Format for Transfer - WORD format WORD format (see ":WAVeform:FORMat" on page 601) provides 16- bit access to the waveform data. In the WORD format, the number of data bytes is twice the number of data points. The number of data points is the value returned by the :WAVeform:POINts? query (see page 602).
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:BYTeorder (see page 750) Command Syntax :WAVeform:BYTeorder ::= {LSBFirst | MSBFirst} The :WAVeform:BYTeorder command sets the output sequence of the WORD data. The parameter MSBFirst sets the most significant byte to be transmitted first. The parameter LSBFirst sets the least significant byte to be transmitted first. This command affects the transmitting sequence only when :WAVeform:FORMat WORD is selected. The default setting is LSBFirst.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:COUNt (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:COUNt? The :WAVeform:COUNT? query returns the count used to acquire the current waveform. This may differ from current values if the unit has been stopped and its configuration modified. For all acquisition types except average, this value is 1.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:DATA (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:DATA? The :WAVeform:DATA query returns the binary block of sampled data points transmitted using the IEEE 488.2 arbitrary block data format. The binary data is formatted according to the settings of the :WAVeform:UNSigned, :WAVeform:BYTeorder, :WAVeform:FORMat, and :WAVeform:SOURce commands. The number of points returned is controlled by the :WAVeform:POINts command.
5 Commands by Subsystem ' and the actual waveform data followed by a new line (NL) character. ' The query data has the following format: ' ' ' ' Where: ' = #800001000 (This is an example header) ' The "#8" may be stripped off of the header and the remaining ' numbers are the size, in bytes, of the waveform data block. The ' size can vary depending on the number of points acquired for the ' waveform.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:FORMat (see page 750) Command Syntax :WAVeform:FORMat ::= {WORD | BYTE | ASCii} The :WAVeform:FORMat command sets the data transmission mode for waveform data points. This command controls how the data is formatted when sent from the oscilloscope. • ASCii formatted data converts the internal integer data values to real Y- axis values. Values are transferred as ASCii digits in floating point notation, separated by commas.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:POINts (see page 750) Command Syntax :WAVeform:POINts <# points> <# points> ::= {100 | 250 | 500 | 1000 | } if waveform points mode is NORMal <# points> ::= {100 | 250 | 500 | 1000 | 2000 | 5000 | 10000 | 20000 | 50000 | 100000 | 200000 | 500000 | 1000000 | 2000000 | 4000000 | 8000000 | } if waveform points mode is MAXimum or RAW ::= {NORMal | MAXimum | RAW} NOTE The option is deprecated.
Commands by Subsystem NOTE See Also 5 If a full screen of data is not displayed, the number of points returned will not be 1000 or an even divisor of it.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:POINts:MODE (see page 750) Command Syntax :WAVeform:POINts:MODE ::= {NORMal | MAXimum | RAW} The :WAVeform:POINts:MODE command sets the data record to be transferred with the :WAVeform:DATA? query. For the analog sources, there are three different records that can be transferred: • The first is the raw acquisition record. The maximum number of points available in this record is returned by the :ACQuire:POINts? query.
Commands by Subsystem 5 • :ACQuire:TYPE must be set to NORMal, AVERage, or HRESolution. If AVERage, :ACQuire:COUNt must be set to 1 in order to return more than the measurement record or precision analysis record. • MAXimum or RAW will allow up to 8,000,000 points to be returned. The number of points returned will vary as the instrument's configuration is changed. Use the :WAVeform:POINts? MAXimum query to determine the maximum number of points that can be retrieved at the current settings.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:PREamble (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:PREamble? The :WAVeform:PREamble query requests the preamble information for the selected waveform source. The preamble data contains information concerning the vertical and horizontal scaling of the data of the corresponding channel.
5 Commands by Subsystem Delay = (#points / 2) * Xincrement + Xorigin Y increment = voltage of 1 Vstep Offset Y origin (V) Y reference = #Vsteps / 2 #Vsteps = 65536 (if format = WORD) 256 (if format = BYTE) X origin (t) X reference = 0 X increment (t) = time between successive points See Also • "Introduction to :WAVeform Commands" on page 592 • ":ACQuire:COUNt" on page 181 • ":ACQuire:POINts" on page 184 • ":ACQuire:TYPE" on page 191 • ":DIGitize" on page 146 • ":WAVeform:COUNt" on page 598 • ":WAVef
5 Commands by Subsystem ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim TYPE POINTS COUNT XINCREMENT XORIGIN XREFERENCE YINCREMENT YORIGIN YREFERENCE : : : : : : int16 int32 int32 float64 float64 int32 - 0 = NORMAL, 1 = PEAK DETECT, 2 = AVERAGE number of data points transferred. 1 and is always 1. - time difference between data points. - always the first data point in memory. specifies the data point associated with x-origin. : float32 - voltage diff between data points.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt (see page 750) Query Syntax NOTE :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt? This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. The :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt query returns the number of memory segments in the acquired data. You can use the :WAVeform:SEGMented:COUNt? query while segments are being acquired (although :DIGitize blocks subsequent queries until the full segmented acquisition is complete).
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG (see page 750) Query Syntax NOTE :WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG? This command is available when the segmented memory option (Option SGM) is enabled. The :WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG? query returns the time tag of the currently selected segmented memory index. The index is selected using the :ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex command.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :WAVeform:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH | SBUS} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :WAVeform:SOURce command selects the analog channel, function, or serial decode bus to be used as the source for the :WAVeform commands.
5 Commands by Subsystem ' WAVE_POINTS - Specifies the number of points to be transferred ' using the ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query. myScope.WriteString ":WAVEFORM:POINTS 1000" ' WAVE_FORMAT - Sets the data transmission mode for the waveform ' data output. This command controls whether data is formatted in ' a word or byte format when sent from the oscilloscope. Dim lngVSteps As Long Dim intBytesPerData As Integer ' Data in range 0 to 65535. myScope.
5 Commands by Subsystem lngXReference = Preamble(6) sngYIncrement = Preamble(7) sngYOrigin = Preamble(8) lngYReference = Preamble(9) strOutput = "" 'strOutput = strOutput + "Format = " + CStr(intFormat) + vbCrLf 'strOutput = strOutput + "Type = " + CStr(intType) + vbCrLf 'strOutput = strOutput + "Points = " + CStr(lngPoints) + vbCrLf 'strOutput = strOutput + "Count = " + CStr(lngCount) + vbCrLf 'strOutput = strOutput + "X increment = " + _ ' FormatNumber(dblXIncrement * 1000000) + " us" + vbCrLf 'strOutpu
5 Commands by Subsystem varQueryResult = myScope.ReadIEEEBlock(BinaryType_UI1) For lngI = 0 To UBound(varQueryResult) _ Step (UBound(varQueryResult) / 20) ' 20 points. If intBytesPerData = 2 Then lngDataValue = varQueryResult(lngI) * 256 _ + varQueryResult(lngI + 1) ' 16-bit value. Else lngDataValue = varQueryResult(lngI) ' 8-bit value.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource (see page 750) Command Syntax :WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource ::= {{NONE | RX} | TX} If the :WAVeform:SOURce is SBUS (serial decode), more than one data set may be available, and this command lets you choose from the available data sets. Currently, only UART serial decode lets you get "TX" data. The default, NONE, specifies "RX" data. (RX is an alias for NONE.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:TYPE (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:TYPE? The :WAVeform:TYPE? query returns the acquisition mode associated with the currently selected waveform. The acquisition mode is set by the :ACQuire:TYPE command.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:UNSigned (see page 750) Command Syntax :WAVeform:UNSigned ::= {{0 | OFF} | {1 | ON}} The :WAVeform:UNSigned command turns unsigned mode on or off for the currently selected waveform. Use the WAVeform:UNSigned command to control whether data values are sent as unsigned or signed integers. This command can be used to match the instrument's internal data type to the data type used by the programming language.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:VIEW (see page 750) Command Syntax :WAVeform:VIEW ::= {MAIN} The :WAVeform:VIEW command sets the view setting associated with the currently selected waveform. Currently, the only legal value for the view setting is MAIN. Query Syntax :WAVeform:VIEW? The :WAVeform:VIEW? query returns the view setting associated with the currently selected waveform.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:XINCrement (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:XINCrement? The :WAVeform:XINCrement? query returns the x- increment value for the currently specified source. This value is the time difference between consecutive data points in seconds.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:XORigin (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:XORigin? The :WAVeform:XORigin? query returns the x- origin value for the currently specified source. XORigin is the X- axis value of the data point specified by the :WAVeform:XREFerence value. In this product, that is always the X- axis value of the first data point (XREFerence = 0).
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:XREFerence (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:XREFerence? The :WAVeform:XREFerence? query returns the x- reference value for the currently specified source. This value specifies the index of the data point associated with the x- origin data value. In this product, the x- reference point is the first point displayed and XREFerence is always 0.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:YINCrement (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:YINCrement? The :WAVeform:YINCrement? query returns the y- increment value in volts for the currently specified source. This value is the voltage difference between consecutive data values.
Commands by Subsystem 5 :WAVeform:YORigin (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:YORigin? The :WAVeform:YORigin? query returns the y- origin value for the currently specified source. This value is the Y- axis value of the data value specified by the :WAVeform:YREFerence value. For this product, this is the Y- axis value of the center of the screen.
5 Commands by Subsystem :WAVeform:YREFerence (see page 750) Query Syntax :WAVeform:YREFerence? The :WAVeform:YREFerence? query returns the y- reference value for the currently specified source. This value specifies the data point value where the y- origin occurs. In this product, this is the data point value of the center of the screen. It is undefined if the format is ASCii.
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 6 Commands A-Z A 625 B 626 C 627 D 629 E 631 F 632 G 633 H 634 I 634 L 635 M 636 N 639 O 639 P 640 Q 642 R 642 S 643 T 648 U 653 V 654 W 655 X 656 Y 656 A • AALias, ":ACQuire:AALias" on page 179 • ":ACQuire:AALias" on page 179 • ":ACQuire:COMPlete" on page 180 • ":ACQuire:COUNt" on page 181 • ":ACQuire:DAALias" on page 182 • ":ACQuire:MODE" on page 183 625
6 Commands A-Z • ":ACQuire:POINts" on page 184 • ":ACQuire:SEGMented:ANALyze" on page 185 • ":ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt" on page 186 • ":ACQuire:SEGMented:INDex" on page 187 • ":ACQuire:SRATe" on page 190 • ":ACQuire:TYPE" on page 191 • ADDRess, ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess" on page 519 • ":AER (Arm Event Register)" on page 139 • ALIGnment, ":TRIGger:I2S:ALIGnment" on page 502 • AMASk Commands: • ":MTESt:AMASk:CREate" on page 342 • ":MTESt:AMASk:{SAVE | STORe}" on page 693 • ":MTESt:AMASk:SOURce" on page 3
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TRIGger:UART:BASE" on page 572 • BAUDrate Commands: • ":TRIGger:CAN:SIGNal:BAUDrate" on page 459 • ":TRIGger:FLEXray:BAUDrate" on page 482 • ":TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:BAUDrate" on page 535 • ":TRIGger:UART:BAUDrate" on page 573 • BIND, ":MTESt:SCALe:BIND" on page 364 • BITorder Commands: • ":SBUS:SPI:BITorder" on page 411 • ":TRIGger:UART:BITorder" on page 574 • ":BLANk" on page 144 • BURSt, ":TRIGger:UART:BURSt" on page 575 • BWLimit Commands: • ":CHANnel:BWLimit" on page 206 • ":EXTerna
6 Commands A-Z • CHANnel, ":TRIGger:FLEXray:CHANnel" on page 483 • ":CHANnel:LABel" on page 662 • ":CHANnel2:SKEW" on page 663 • ":CHANnel:BWLimit" on page 206 • ":CHANnel:COUPling" on page 207 • ":CHANnel:DISPlay" on page 208 • ":CHANnel:IMPedance" on page 209 • ":CHANnel:INPut" on page 664 • ":CHANnel:INVert" on page 210 • ":CHANnel:LABel" on page 211 • ":CHANnel:OFFSet" on page 212 • ":CHANnel:PMODe" on page 665 • ":CHANnel:PROBe" on page 213 • ":CHANnel:PROBe:HEAD[:TYP
Commands A-Z 6 • CONDition, ":HWERegister:CONDition (Hardware Event Condition Register)" on page 150 • CONNect, ":DISPlay:CONNect" on page 666 • COUNt Commands: • ":ACQuire:COUNt" on page 181 • ":ACQuire:SEGMented:COUNt" on page 186 • ":MTESt:AVERage:COUNt" on page 695 • ":MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms" on page 347 • ":MTESt:COUNt:RESet" on page 348 • ":MTESt:COUNt:TIME" on page 349 • ":MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms" on page 350 • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:ERRor" on page 396 • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:OVERload" on page 397 • ":SBUS:CAN:
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:CAN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth" on page 455 • ":TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA" on page 505 • ":TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:DATA" on page 512 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA" on page 520 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATa2" on page 521 • ":TRIGger:IIC[:SOURce]:DATA" on page 523 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA" on page 530 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth" on page 532 • ":TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA" on page 542 • ":TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA" on page 559 • ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:DATA" on page 562 • ":TRIGger:UART:
Commands A-Z 6 • ":DISPlay:SOURce" on page 231 • ":DISPlay:VECTors" on page 232 • DMINus, ":TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus" on page 586 • DPLus, ":TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus" on page 587 • DSP, ":SYSTem:DSP" on page 421 • DURation, ":TRIGger:DURation Commands" on page 464 • DUTYcycle, ":MEASure:DUTYcycle" on page 299 E • EBURst, ":TRIGger:EBURst Commands" on page 470 • EDGE Commands: • ":TRIGger[:EDGE] Commands" on page 474 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE" on page 549 • ENABle":MTESt:ENABle" on page 353 • ":ERASe" on
6 Commands A-Z F • FACTion Commands: • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure" on page 357 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt" on page 358 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:SAVE" on page 359 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP" on page 360 • FACTors Commands: • ":HARDcopy:FACTors" on page 264 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors" on page 382 • FALLtime, ":MEASure:FALLtime" on page 300 • FFEed, ":HARDcopy:FFEed" on page 265 • FILename Commands: • ":HARDcopy:FILename" on page 674 • ":RECall:FILename" on page 372 • ":SAVE:FILename" on page 379 • FIND,
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat" on page 507 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat" on page 533 • ":WAVeform:FORMat" on page 601 • FRAMe, ":TRIGger:SPI:SOURce:FRAMe" on page 563 • FRAMing Commands: • ":SBUS:UART:FRAMing" on page 418 • ":TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing" on page 558 • FREQuency, ":MEASure:FREQuency" on page 301 • ":FUNCtion:CENTer" on page 246 • ":FUNCtion:DISPlay" on page 247 • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation" on page 248 • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1" on page 249 • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2" on page 250 •
6 Commands A-Z H • ":HARDcopy:AREA" on page 262 • ":HARDcopy:APRinter" on page 263 • ":HARDcopy:DESTination" on page 672 • ":HARDcopy:DEVice" on page 673 • ":HARDcopy:FACTors" on page 264 • ":HARDcopy:FFEed" on page 265 • ":HARDcopy:FILename" on page 674 • ":HARDcopy:FORMat" on page 675 • ":HARDcopy:GRAYscale" on page 676 • ":HARDcopy:IGColors" on page 677 • ":HARDcopy:INKSaver" on page 266 • ":HARDcopy:LAYout" on page 267 • ":HARDcopy:PALette" on page 268 • ":HARDcopy:PDRiver" on page 678 • ":HARDcopy:P
Commands A-Z 6 • ":SBUS:IIC:ASIZe" on page 407 • ":TRIGger:IIC Commands" on page 518 • IGColors Commands: • ":HARDcopy:IGColors" on page 677 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver" on page 384 • IMAGe Commands: • ":RECall:IMAGe[:STARt]" on page 373 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:AREA" on page 381 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors" on page 382 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat" on page 383 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver" on page 384 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:PALette" on page 385 • ":SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt]" on page 380 • IMPedance Commands: • ":CHANnel:IMPedance" on page 209 • "
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel" on page 476 • ":TRIGger:GLITch:LEVel" on page 495 • LFIFty, ":TRIGger:LFIFty" on page 446 • LIN Commands: • ":SBUS:LIN:PARity" on page 408 • ":TRIGger:LIN Commands" on page 527 • LINE, ":TRIGger:TV:LINE" on page 565 • LIST, ":HARDcopy:PRINter:LIST" on page 269 • LISTer Commands: • ":LISTer:DATA" on page 272 • ":LISTer:DISPlay" on page 273 • ":SAVE:LISTer[:STARt]" on page 386 • LOAD, ":MTESt:LOAD" on page 696 • LOCK Commands: • ":MTESt:LOCK" on page 354 • ":SYSTem:L
Commands A-Z 6 • ":SAVE:MASK[:STARt]" on page 387 • ":MEASure:CLEar" on page 292 • ":MEASure:COUNter" on page 293 • ":MEASure:DEFine" on page 294 • ":MEASure:DELay" on page 297 • ":MEASure:DUTYcycle" on page 299 • ":MEASure:FALLtime" on page 300 • ":MEASure:FREQuency" on page 301 • ":MEASure:LOWer" on page 679 • ":MEASure:NWIDth" on page 302 • ":MEASure:OVERshoot" on page 303 • ":MEASure:PERiod" on page 305 • ":MEASure:PHASe" on page 306 • ":MEASure:PREShoot" on page 307 • ":MEASure:PWIDth" on page 308 •
6 Commands A-Z • ":MEASure:VAVerage" on page 325 • ":MEASure:VBASe" on page 326 • ":MEASure:VDELta" on page 690 • ":MEASure:VMAX" on page 327 • ":MEASure:VMIN" on page 328 • ":MEASure:VPP" on page 329 • ":MEASure:VRATio" on page 330 • ":MEASure:VRMS" on page 331 • ":MEASure:VSTArt" on page 691 • ":MEASure:VSTOp" on page 692 • ":MEASure:VTIMe" on page 332 • ":MEASure:VTOP" on page 333 • ":MEASure:WINDow" on page 334 • ":MEASure:XMAX" on page 335 • ":MEASure:XMIN" on page 336 • MEASure, ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTio
Commands A-Z 6 • ":MTESt:AVERage:COUNt" on page 695 • ":MTESt:COUNt:FWAVeforms" on page 347 • ":MTESt:COUNt:RESet" on page 348 • ":MTESt:COUNt:TIME" on page 349 • ":MTESt:COUNt:WAVeforms" on page 350 • ":MTESt:DATA" on page 351 • ":MTESt:DELete" on page 352 • ":MTESt:ENABle" on page 353 • ":MTESt:LOAD" on page 696 • ":MTESt:LOCK" on page 354 • ":MTESt:OUTPut" on page 355 • ":MTESt:RMODe" on page 356 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure" on page 357 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt" on page 358 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FAC
6 Commands A-Z • ":FUNCtion:OFFSet" on page 251 • "*OPC (Operation Complete)" on page 122 • ":OPEE (Operation Status Enable Register)" on page 159 • OPERation Commands: • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:OPERation" on page 248 • ":FUNCtion:OPERation" on page 252 • ":OPERegister:CONDition (Operation Status Condition Register)" on page 161 • ":OPERegister[:EVENt] (Operation Status Event Register)" on page 163 • "*OPT (Option Identification)" on page 123 • OUTPut Commands: • ":CALibrate:OUTPut" on page 197 • ":MTESt:OUTPut"
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:DATA:LENGth" on page 532 • ":TRIGger:LIN:PATTern:FORMat" on page 533 • ":TRIGger:M1553:PATTern:DATA" on page 542 • ":TRIGger:PATTern" on page 449 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern" on page 551 • ":TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DATA" on page 559 • ":TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:WIDTh" on page 560 • PDRiver, ":HARDcopy:PDRiver" on page 678 • PERiod, ":MEASure:PERiod" on page 305 • PERSistence, ":DISPlay:PERSistence" on page 230 • PHASe, ":MEASure:PHASe" on page 306 • PMODe, ":CHANnel:PMODe
6 Commands A-Z • ":CHANnel:PROBe:STYPe" on page 217 • ":EXTernal:PROBe" on page 237 • PROTection Commands: • ":CHANnel:PROTection" on page 218 • ":EXTernal:PROTection" on page 240 • ":SYSTem:PROTection:LOCK" on page 425 • Pulse Width (GLITch), ":TRIGger:GLITch Commands" on page 492 • PWD Commands: • ":RECall:PWD" on page 375 • ":SAVE:PWD" on page 388 • PWIDth, ":MEASure:PWIDth" on page 308 Q • QUALifier Commands: • ":TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier" on page 468 • ":TRIGger:GLITch:QUALifier" on page 497
Commands A-Z 6 • REJect, ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect" on page 477 • RESet Commands: • ":MEASure:STATistics:RESet" on page 319 • ":MTESt:COUNt:RESet" on page 348 • ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:RESet" on page 398 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:RESet" on page 415 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet" on page 552 • RESults, ":MEASure:RESults" on page 309 • RISetime, ":MEASure:RISetime" on page 312 • RMODe Commands: • ":MTESt:RMODe" on page 356 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:MEASure" on page 357 • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:PRINt" on page 358 • ":MTESt:RMODe
6 Commands A-Z • ":SAVE:FILename" on page 379 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:AREA" on page 381 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FACTors" on page 382 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:FORMat" on page 383 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:INKSaver" on page 384 • ":SAVE:IMAGe:PALette" on page 385 • ":SAVE:IMAGe[:STARt]" on page 380 • ":SAVE:LISTer[:STARt]" on page 386 • ":SAVE:MASK[:STARt]" on page 387 • ":SAVE:PWD" on page 388 • ":SAVE:SETup[:STARt]" on page 389 • ":SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat" on page 391 • ":SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth" on page 392 • ":SAVE:WAVeform:SEGMented" on page 393
Commands A-Z 6 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:RXFRames" on page 416 • ":SBUS:UART:COUNt:TXFRames" on page 417 • ":SBUS:UART:FRAMing" on page 418 • SCALe Commands: • ":CHANnel:SCALe" on page 220 • ":FUNCtion:SCALe" on page 255 • ":MTESt:SCALe:BIND" on page 364 • ":MTESt:SCALe:X1" on page 365 • ":MTESt:SCALe:XDELta" on page 366 • ":MTESt:SCALe:Y1" on page 367 • ":MTESt:SCALe:Y2" on page 368 • ":TIMebase:SCALe" on page 435 • ":TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe" on page 439 • SCRatch, ":MEASure:SCRatch" on page 680 • SDEViation,
6 Commands A-Z • ":SINGle" on page 172 • SKEW, ":CHANnel:PROBe:SKEW" on page 216 • SLOPe Commands: • ":TRIGger:EBURst:SLOPe" on page 473 • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe" on page 478 • ":TRIGger:I2S:CLOCk:SLOPe" on page 504 • ":TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe" on page 556 • SOFailure, ":MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure" on page 698 • SOURce Commands: • ":DISPlay:SOURce" on page 231 • ":FUNCtion:SOURce" on page 670 • ":MEASure:SOURce" on page 315 • ":MTESt:AMASk:SOURce" on page 343 • ":MTESt:SOURce" on page 369 • ":MTESt:TRIGger
Commands A-Z 6 • ":WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource" on page 615 • SOURce1 Commands: • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce1" on page 249 • ":FUNCtion:SOURce1" on page 256 • SOURce2 Commands: • ":FUNCtion:GOFT:SOURce2" on page 250 • ":FUNCtion:SOURce2" on page 257 • SPAN, ":FUNCtion:SPAN" on page 258 • SPEed, ":TRIGger:USB:SPEed" on page 588 • SPI Commands: • ":SBUS:SPI:BITorder" on page 411 • ":SBUS:SPI:WIDTh" on page 412 • ":TRIGger:SPI Commands" on page 555 • SRATe, ":ACQuire:SRATe" on page 190 • "*SRE (Service Request Ena
6 Commands A-Z • ":CALibrate:STATus" on page 199 • ":STATus" on page 173 • "*STB (Read Status Byte)" on page 131 • STOP Commands: • ":MTESt:RMODe:FACTion:STOP" on page 360 • ":MTESt:{STARt | STOP}" on page 699 • ":STOP" on page 174 • STORe, ":MTESt:AMASk:{SAVE | STORe}" on page 693 • SUBSource, ":WAVeform:SOURce:SUBSource" on page 615 • SWEep, ":TRIGger:SWEep" on page 451 • SWITch, ":CALibrate:SWITch" on page 200 • SYNCbreak, ":TRIGger:LIN:SYNCbreak" on page 538 • ":SYSTem:DATE" on page 420 • ":SYSTem:DSP
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TIMebase:VERNier" on page 436 • ":TIMebase:WINDow:POSition" on page 437 • ":TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe" on page 438 • ":TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe" on page 439 • TIMeout, ":TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout" on page 557 • TIMer, ":TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer" on page 553 • TITLe, ":MTESt:TITLe" on page 370 • TMAX, ":MEASure:TMAX" on page 683 • TMIN, ":MEASure:TMIN" on page 684 • TOTal, ":SBUS:CAN:COUNt:TOTal" on page 399 • "*TRG (Trigger)" on page 133 • TRIGger Commands: • ":MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce" on page 700
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:CAN:SOURce" on page 461 • ":TRIGger:CAN:TRIGger" on page 462 • ":TRIGger:DURation:GREaterthan" on page 465 • ":TRIGger:DURation:LESSthan" on page 466 • ":TRIGger:DURation:PATTern" on page 467 • ":TRIGger:DURation:QUALifier" on page 468 • ":TRIGger:DURation:RANGe" on page 469 • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:COUPling" on page 475 • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:LEVel" on page 476 • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:REJect" on page 477 • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:SLOPe" on page 478 • ":TRIGger[:EDGE]:SOURce" on page 479 • ":TRIGger:
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:DATA" on page 505 • ":TRIGger:I2S:PATTern:FORMat" on page 507 • ":TRIGger:I2S:RANGe" on page 508 • ":TRIGger:I2S:RWIDth" on page 510 • ":TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:CLOCk" on page 511 • ":TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:DATA" on page 512 • ":TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:WSELect" on page 513 • ":TRIGger:I2S:TRIGger" on page 514 • ":TRIGger:I2S:TWIDth" on page 516 • ":TRIGger:I2S:WSLow" on page 517 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:ADDRess" on page 519 • ":TRIGger:IIC:PATTern:DATA" on page 520 • ":TRIGger:IIC:
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:NREJect" on page 448 • ":TRIGger:PATTern" on page 449 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:COUNt" on page 548 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:EDGE" on page 549 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:FIND" on page 550 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:PATTern" on page 551 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:RESet" on page 552 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:TIMer" on page 553 • ":TRIGger:SEQuence:TRIGger" on page 554 • ":TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:SLOPe" on page 556 • ":TRIGger:SPI:CLOCk:TIMeout" on page 557 • ":TRIGger:SPI:FRAMing" on page 558 • ":TRIGger:SPI:PATTern:DA
Commands A-Z 6 • ":TRIGger:UART:TYPE" on page 583 • ":TRIGger:UART:WIDTh" on page 584 • ":TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DMINus" on page 586 • ":TRIGger:USB:SOURce:DPLus" on page 587 • ":TRIGger:USB:SPEed" on page 588 • ":TRIGger:USB:TRIGger" on page 589 • "*TST (Self Test)" on page 134 • TSTArt, ":MEASure:TSTArt" on page 685 • TSTOp, ":MEASure:TSTOp" on page 686 • TTAG, ":WAVeform:SEGMented:TTAG" on page 610 • TV, ":TRIGger:TV Commands" on page 564 • TVALue, ":MEASure:TVALue" on page 322 • TVOLt, ":MEASure:TVOLt" on
6 Commands A-Z • ":TRIGger:UART:BITorder" on page 574 • ":TRIGger:UART:BURSt" on page 575 • ":TRIGger:UART:DATA" on page 576 • ":TRIGger:UART:IDLE" on page 577 • ":TRIGger:UART:PARity" on page 578 • ":TRIGger:UART:POLarity" on page 579 • ":TRIGger:UART:QUALifier" on page 580 • ":TRIGger:UART:SOURce:RX" on page 581 • ":TRIGger:UART:SOURce:TX" on page 582 • ":TRIGger:UART:TYPE" on page 583 • ":TRIGger:UART:WIDTh" on page 584 • UNITs Commands: • ":CHANnel:UNITs" on page 221 • ":EXTernal:UNITs" on page 242
Commands A-Z 6 • VTIMe, ":MEASure:VTIMe" on page 332 • VTOP, ":MEASure:VTOP" on page 333 W • "*WAI (Wait To Continue)" on page 135 • WAVeform Commands: • ":SAVE:WAVeform:FORMat" on page 391 • ":SAVE:WAVeform:LENGth" on page 392 • ":SAVE:WAVeform[:STARt]" on page 390 • ":WAVeform:BYTeorder" on page 597 • ":WAVeform:COUNt" on page 598 • ":WAVeform:DATA" on page 599 • ":WAVeform:FORMat" on page 601 • ":WAVeform:POINts" on page 602 • ":WAVeform:POINts:MODE" on page 604 • ":WAVeform:PREamble" on page 606 • ":
6 Commands A-Z • ":FUNCtion:WINDow" on page 259 • ":TIMebase:WINDow:POSition" on page 437 • ":TIMebase:WINDow:RANGe" on page 438 • ":TIMebase:WINDow:SCALe" on page 439 • ":MEASure:WINDow" on page 334 • WSELect, ":TRIGger:I2S:SOURce:WSELect" on page 513 • WSLow, ":TRIGger:I2S:WSLow" on page 517 X • X1, ":MTESt:SCALe:X1" on page 365 • X1Position, ":MARKer:X1Position" on page 277 • X1Y1source, ":MARKer:X1Y1source" on page 278 • X2Position, ":MARKer:X2Position" on page 279 • X2Y2source, ":MARKer:X2Y2source"
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Obsolete commands are older forms of commands that are provided to reduce customer rework for existing systems and programs (see"Obsolete Commands" on page 750).
7 658 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent Behavior Differences :EXTernal:INPut (see page 668) :EXTernal:IMPedance (see page 236) :EXTernal:PMODe (see page 669) none FUNCtion1, FUNCtion2 :FUNCtion Commands (see page 243) ADD not included :FUNCtion:SOURce (see page 670) :FUNCtion:SOURce1 (see page 256) Obsolete command has ADD, SUBTract, and MULTiply parameters; current command has GOFT parameter.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent Behavior Differences :MEASure:THResholds (see page 682) :MEASure:DEFine:THResholds (see page 294) MEASure:DEFine:THResholds can define absolute values or percentage :MEASure:TMAX (see page 683) :MEASure:XMAX (see page 335) :MEASure:TMIN (see page 684) :MEASure:XMIN (see page 336) :MEASure:TSTArt (see page 685) :MARKer:X1Position (see page 277) :MEASure:TSTOp (see page 686) :MARKer:X2Position (see page 279) :MEAS
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Discontinued Commands 660 Obsolete Command Current Command Equivalent :PRINt? (see page 701) :DISPlay:DATA? (see page 226) :TIMebase:DELay (see page 703) :TIMebase:POSition (see page 432) or :TIMebase:WINDow:POSition (see page 437) :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge (see page 704) none :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinitio n (see page 705) none :TRIGger:TV:TVMode (see page 706) :TRIGger:TV:MODE (see page 566) Behavior Differences TIMebase:POSition is position value of mai
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands Discontinued Command Current Command Equivalent DISPlay:TEXT none FUNCtion:MOVE none FUNCtion:PEAKs none HARDcopy:ADDRess none Only parallel printer port is supported.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel:LABel (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:LABel ::= {CHANnel1 | CHANnel2 | DIGital0,..,DIGital15} ::= quoted ASCII string The :CHANnel:LABel command sets the source text to the string that follows. Setting a channel will also result in the name being added to the label list. NOTE Query Syntax The :CHANnel:LABel command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel2:SKEW (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel2:SKEW ::= skew time in NR3 format ::= -100 ns to +100 ns The :CHANnel2:SKEW command sets the skew between channels 1 and 2. The maximum skew is +/- 100 ns. You can use the oscilloscope's analog probe skew control to remove cable delay errors between channel 1 and channel 2.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :CHANnel:INPut (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:INPut ::= {ONEMeg | FIFTy} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :CHANnel:INPut command selects the input impedance setting for the specified channel. The legal values for this command are ONEMeg (1 M) and FIFTy (50).
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :CHANnel:PMODe (see page 750) Command Syntax :CHANnel:PMODe ::= {AUTo | MANual} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The probe sense mode is controlled internally and cannot be set. If a probe with sense is connected to the specified channel, auto sensing is enabled; otherwise, the mode is manual.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :DISPlay:CONNect (see page 750) Command Syntax :DISPlay:CONNect ::= {{ 1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :DISPlay:CONNect command turns vectors on and off. When vectors are turned on, the oscilloscope displays lines connecting sampled data points. When vectors are turned off, only the sampled data is displayed. NOTE Query Syntax The :DISPlay:CONNEct command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :ERASe (see page 750) Command Syntax :ERASe The :ERASe command erases the screen. NOTE The :ERASe command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :CDISplay command (see page 145) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :EXTernal:INPut (see page 750) Command Syntax :EXTernal:INPut ::= {ONEMeg | FIFTy} The :EXTernal:IMPedance command selects the input impedance setting for the external trigger. The legal values for this command are ONEMeg (1 M) and FIFTy (50). NOTE Query Syntax The :EXTernal:INPut command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :EXTernal:IMPedance command (see page 236) instead.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :EXTernal:PMODe (see page 750) Command Syntax :EXTernal:PMODe ::= {AUTo | MANual} The probe sense mode is controlled internally and cannot be set. If a probe with sense is connected to the specified channel, auto sensing is enabled; otherwise, the mode is manual. If the pmode sent matches the oscilloscope's setting, the command will be accepted. Otherwise, a setting conflict error is generated.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :FUNCtion:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:SOURce ::= {CHANnel | ADD | SUBTract | MULTiply} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :FUNCtion:SOURce command is only used when an FFT (Fast Fourier Transform), DIFF, or INT operation is selected (see the:FUNCtion:OPERation command for more information about selecting an operation).
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :FUNCtion:VIEW (see page 750) Command Syntax :FUNCtion:VIEW ::= {{1 | ON} | (0 | OFF}} The :FUNCtion:VIEW command turns the selected function on or off. When ON is selected, the function performs as specified using the other FUNCtion commands. When OFF is selected, function is neither calculated nor displayed. NOTE Query Syntax The :FUNCtion:VIEW command is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:DESTination (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:DESTination ::= {CENTronics | FLOPpy} The :HARDcopy:DESTination command sets the hardcopy destination. NOTE Query Syntax The :HARDcopy:DESTination command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :HARDcopy:FILename command (see page 674) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:DEVice (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:DEVice ::= {TIFF | GIF | BMP | LASerjet | EPSon | DESKjet | BWDeskjet | SEIKo} The HARDcopy:DEVice command sets the hardcopy device type. NOTE BWDeskjet option refers to the monochrome Deskjet printer. NOTE The :HARDcopy:DEVice command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :HARDcopy:FORMat command (see page 675) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:FILename (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:FILename ::= quoted ASCII string The HARDcopy:FILename command sets the output filename for those print formats whose output is a file. NOTE Query Syntax The :HARDcopy:FILename command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :SAVE:FILename command (see page 379) and :RECall:FILename command (see page 372) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:FORMat (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:FORMat ::= {BMP[24bit] | BMP8bit | PNG | CSV | ASCiixy | BINary | PRINter0 | PRINter1} The HARDcopy:FORMat command sets the hardcopy format type. PRINter0 and PRINter1 are only valid when printers are connected to the oscilloscope's USB ports. (The first printer connected/identified is PRINter0 and the second is PRINter1.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:GRAYscale (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:GRAYscale ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The :HARDcopy:GRAYscale command controls whether grayscaling is performed in the hardcopy dump. NOTE Query Syntax The :HARDcopy:GRAYscale command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :HARDcopy:PALette command (see page 268) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:IGColors (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:IGColors ::= {{OFF | 0} | {ON | 1}} The HARDcopy:IGColors command controls whether the graticule colors are inverted or not. NOTE Query Syntax The :HARDcopy:IGColors command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :HARDcopy:INKSaver (see page 266) command instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :HARDcopy:PDRiver (see page 750) Command Syntax :HARDcopy:PDRiver ::= {AP2Xxx | AP21xx | {AP2560 | AP25} | {DJ350 | DJ35} | DJ6xx | {DJ630 | DJ63} | DJ6Special | DJ6Photo | DJ8Special | DJ8xx | DJ9Vip | OJPRokx50 | DJ9xx | GVIP | DJ55xx | {PS470 | PS47} {PS100 | PS10} | CLASer | MLASer | LJFastraster | POSTscript} The HARDcopy:PDRiver command sets the hardcopy printer driver used for the selected printer.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:LOWer (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:LOWer The :MEASure:LOWer command sets the lower measurement threshold value. This value and the UPPer value represent absolute values when the thresholds are ABSolute and percentage when the thresholds are PERCent as defined by the :MEASure:DEFine THResholds command. NOTE Query Syntax The :MEASure:LOWer command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:SCRatch (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:SCRatch The :MEASure:SCRatch command clears all selected measurements and markers from the screen. NOTE 680 The :MEASure:SCRatch command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :MEASure:CLEar command (see page 292) instead.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :MEASure:TDELta (see page 750) Query Syntax :MEASure:TDELta? The :MEASure:TDELta? query returns the time difference between the Tstop marker (X2 cursor) and the Tstart marker (X1 cursor). Tdelta = Tstop - Tstart Tstart is the time at the start marker (X1 cursor) and Tstop is the time at the stop marker (X2 cursor). No measurement is made when the :MEASure:TDELta? query is received by the oscilloscope. The delta time value that is output is the current value.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:THResholds (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:THResholds {T1090 | T2080 | VOLTage} The :MEASure:THResholds command selects the thresholds used when making time measurements. NOTE Query Syntax The :MEASure:THResholds command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :MEASure:DEFine THResholds command (see page 294) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:TMAX (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:TMAX [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:TMAX command installs a screen measurement and starts an X- at- Max- Y measurement on the selected waveform. If the optional source is specified, the current source is modified.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:TMIN (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:TMIN [] ::= {CHANnel | FUNCtion | MATH} ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MEASure:TMIN command installs a screen measurement and starts an X- at- Min- Y measurement on the selected waveform. If the optional source is specified, the current source is modified.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :MEASure:TSTArt (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:TSTArt [suffix] ::= time at the start marker in seconds [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :MEASure:TSTArt command moves the start marker (X1 cursor) to the specified time with respect to the trigger time. NOTE The short form of this command, TSTA, does not follow the defined Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules (see page 752).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:TSTOp (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:TSTOp [suffix] ::= time at the stop marker in seconds [suffix] ::= {s | ms | us | ns | ps} The :MEASure:TSTOp command moves the stop marker (X2 cursor) to the specified time with respect to the trigger time. NOTE The short form of this command, TSTO, does not follow the defined Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules (see page 752).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:TVOLt (see page 750) Query Syntax :MEASure:TVOLt? , [][,] ::= the voltage level that the waveform must cross. ::= direction of the waveform. A rising slope is indicated by a plus sign (+). A falling edge is indicated by a minus sign (-). ::= the transition to be reported. If the occurrence number is one, the first crossing is reported. If the number is two, the second crossing is reported, etc.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands ::= time in seconds of the specified voltage crossing in NR3 format 688 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:UPPer (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:UPPer The :MEASure:UPPer command sets the upper measurement threshold value. This value and the LOWer value represent absolute values when the thresholds are ABSolute and percentage when the thresholds are PERCent as defined by the :MEASure:DEFine THResholds command. NOTE Query Syntax The :MEASure:UPPer command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:VDELta (see page 750) Query Syntax :MEASure:VDELta? The :MEASure:VDELta? query returns the voltage difference between vertical marker 1 (Y1 cursor) and vertical marker 2 (Y2 cursor). No measurement is made when the :MEASure:VDELta? query is received by the oscilloscope. The delta value that is returned is the current value. This is the same value as the front- panel cursors delta Y value.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:VSTArt (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VSTArt ::= value for vertical marker 1 The :MEASure:VSTArt command moves the vertical marker (Y1 cursor) to the specified value corresponding to the selected source. The source can be selected by the MARKer:X1Y1source command. NOTE The short form of this command, VSTA, does not follow the defined Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules (see page 752).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MEASure:VSTOp (see page 750) Command Syntax :MEASure:VSTOp ::= value for Y2 cursor The :MEASure:VSTOp command moves the vertical marker 2 (Y2 cursor) to the specified value corresponding to the selected source. The source can be selected by the MARKer:X2Y2source command. NOTE The short form of this command, VSTO, does not follow the defined Long Form to Short Form Truncation Rules (see page 752).
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:AMASk:{SAVE | STORe} (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:AMASk:{SAVE | STORe} "" The :MTESt:AMASk:SAVE command saves the automask generated mask to a file. If an automask has not been generated, an error occurs. The parameter is an MS- DOS compatible name of the file, a maximum of 254 characters long (including the path name, if used). The filename assumes the present working directory if a path does not precede the file name.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:AVERage (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:AVERage ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:AVERage command enables or disables averaging. When ON, the oscilloscope acquires multiple data values for each time bucket, and averages them. When OFF, averaging is disabled. To set the number of averages, use the :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt command described next.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt ::= an integer from 2 to 65536 in NR1 format The :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt command sets the number of averages for the waveforms. With the AVERage acquisition type, the :MTESt:AVERage:COUNt command specifies the number of data values to be averaged for each time bucket before the acquisition is considered complete for that time bucket.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:LOAD (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:LOAD "" The :MTESt:LOAD command loads the specified mask file. The parameter is an MS- DOS compatible name of the file, a maximum of 254 characters long (including the path name, if used). NOTE See Also The :MTESt:LOAD command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :RECall:MASK[:STARt] command (see page 374) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:RUMode (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RUMode {FORever | TIME, | {WAVeforms,}} ::= from 1 to 86400 in NR3 format ::= number of waveforms in NR1 format from 1 to 1,000,000,000 The :MTESt:RUMode command determines the termination conditions for the mask test. The choices are FORever, TIME, or WAVeforms. • FORever — runs the Mask Test until the test is turned off.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure ::= {{1 | ON} | {0 | OFF}} The :MTESt:RUMode:SOFailure command enables or disables the Stop On Failure run until criteria. When a mask test is run and a mask violation is detected, the mask test is stopped and the acquisition system is stopped.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} The :MTESt:{STARt | STOP} command starts or stops the acquisition system. NOTE See Also The :MTESt:STARt and :MTESt:STOP commands are obsolete and are provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :RUN command (see page 170) and :STOP command (see page 174) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce (see page 750) Command Syntax :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce ::= CHANnel ::= {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} for the four channel oscilloscope models ::= {1 | 2} for the two channel oscilloscope models The :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce command sets the channel to use as the trigger. NOTE Query Syntax The :MTESt:TRIGger:SOURce command is obsolete and is provided for backward compatibility to previous oscilloscopes.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :PRINt? (see page 750) Query Syntax :PRINt? [] ::= [][,..,] ::= {COLor | GRAYscale | BMP8bit | BMP} The :PRINt? query pulls image data back over the bus for storage. NOTE The :PRINT command is an obsolete command provided for compatibility to previous oscilloscopes. Use the :DISPlay:DATA command (see page 226) instead.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands NOTE See Also Old Print Option: Is Now: DISK invalid PCL invalid The PRINt? query is not a core command.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :TIMebase:DELay (see page 750) Command Syntax :TIMebase:DELay ::= time in seconds from trigger to the delay reference point on the screen. The valid range for delay settings depends on the time/division setting for the main time base. The :TIMebase:DELay command sets the main time base delay. This delay is the time between the trigger event and the delay reference point on the screen.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge ::= {0 | OFF} This command was used with the N2758A CAN trigger module for 54620/54640 Series mixed- signal oscilloscopes. The InfiniiVision 5000 Series oscilloscopes do not support the N2758A CAN trigger module. Query Syntax :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge? The :TRIGger:CAN:ACKNowledge? query returns the current CAN acknowledge setting.
Obsolete and Discontinued Commands 7 :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition ::= {LIN | RX | TX} The :TRIGger:LIN:SIGNal:DEFinition command sets the LIN signal type. These signals can be set to: Dominant low signals: • LIN — the actual LIN single- end bus signal line. • RX — the Receive signal from the LIN bus transceiver. • TX — the Transmit signal to the LIN bus transceiver.
7 Obsolete and Discontinued Commands :TRIGger:TV:TVMode (see page 750) Command Syntax :TRIGger:TV:TVMode ::= {FIEld1 | FIEld2 | AFIelds | ALINes | LINE | VERTical | LFIeld1 | LFIeld2 | LALTernate | LVERtical} The :TRIGger:TV:MODE command selects the TV trigger mode and field. The LVERtical parameter is only available when :TRIGger:TV:STANdard is GENeric. The LALTernate parameter is not available when :TRIGger:TV:STANdard is GENeric (see page 569).
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 8 Error Messages -440, Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response -430, Query DEADLOCKED -420, Query UNTERMINATED -410, Query INTERRUPTED -400, Query error -340, Calibration failed -330, Self-test failed -321, Out of memory -320, Storage fault -315, Configuration memory lost 707
8 Error Messages -314, Save/recall memory lost -313, Calibration memory lost -311, Memory error -310, System error -300, Device specific error -278, Macro header not found -277, Macro redefinition not allowed -276, Macro recursion error -273, Illegal macro label -272, Macro execution error -258, Media protected -257, File name error -256, File name not found 708 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Error Messages 8 -255, Directory full -254, Media full -253, Corrupt media -252, Missing media -251, Missing mass storage -250, Mass storage error -241, Hardware missing This message can occur when a feature is unavailable or unlicensed.
8 Error Messages -223, Too much data -222, Data out of range -221, Settings conflict -220, Parameter error -200, Execution error -183, Invalid inside macro definition -181, Invalid outside macro definition -178, Expression data not allowed -171, Invalid expression -170, Expression error -168, Block data not allowed -161, Invalid block data -158, String data not allowed 710 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Error Messages 8 -151, Invalid string data -150, String data error -148, Character data not allowed -138, Suffix not allowed -134, Suffix too long -131, Invalid suffix -128, Numeric data not allowed -124, Too many digits -123, Exponent too large -121, Invalid character in number -120, Numeric data error -114, Header suffix out of range -113, Undefined header Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 711
8 Error Messages -112, Program mnemonic too long -109, Missing parameter -108, Parameter not allowed -105, GET not allowed -104, Data type error -103, Invalid separator -102, Syntax error -101, Invalid character -100, Command error +10, Software Fault Occurred +100, File Exists +101, End-Of-File Found +102, Read Error 712 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
8 Error Messages +103, Write Error +104, Illegal Operation +105, Print Canceled +106, Print Initialization Failed +107, Invalid Trace File +108, Compression Error +109, No Data For Operation A remote operation wants some information, but there is no information available. For example, you may request a stored TIFF image using the :DISPlay:DATA? query, but there may be no image stored.
8 714 Error Messages Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 9 Status Reporting Status Reporting Data Structures 718 Status Byte Register (STB) 721 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) 723 Trigger Event Register (TER) 724 Output Queue 725 Message Queue 726 (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) 727 (Standard) Event Status Enable Register (ESE) 728 Error Queue 729 Operation Status Event Register (:OPERegister[:EVENt]) 730 Operation Status Condition Register (:OPERegister:CONDition) 731 Arm Event Regi
9 Status Reporting Trigger Event Register Error Queue Message Queue RUN Bit Output Queue (Mask) Arm Event Register Overload Event Register Overload Event Enable Register (Mask) Standard Event Status Register Standard Event Status Enable Register (Mask) Hardware Event Condition/ Event Registers Hardware Event Enable Register Mask Test Event Register Mask Test Event Enable Register Operation Status Condition/ Event Registers Operation Status Enable Register Status Byte Register Service Reque
Status Reporting 9 The bits in the status byte act as summary bits for the data structures residing behind them. In the case of queues, the summary bit is set if the queue is not empty. For registers, the summary bit is set if any enabled bit in the event register is set. The events are enabled with the corresponding event enable register. Events captured by an event register remain set until the register is read or cleared. Registers are read with their associated commands.
9 Status Reporting Status Reporting Data Structures The following figure shows how the status register bits are masked and logically OR'ed to generate service requests (SRQ) on particular events.
9 Status Reporting From Hardware Event Registers From Overload Event Registers From Mask Test Event Registers Arm Reg HWE OVLR 12 HWE OVLR 15 14 13 12 11 10 Run bit set if oscilloscope not stopped Wait Trig Run 9 5 3 MTE Wait Trig Run MTE 11 AER ? 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 :OPERation:CONDition? Operation Status Condition Register :OPERation[:EVENt]? Operation Status Event Register 2 1 0 :OPEE :OPEE? Operation Status Enable (Mask) Register OR + PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQL OPC
9 Status Reporting The status registers picture above shows how the different status reporting data structures work together. To make it possible for any of the Standard Event Status Register bits to generate a summary bit, the bits must be enabled. These bits are enabled by using the *ESE common command to set the corresponding bit in the Standard Event Status Enable Register.
9 Status Reporting Status Byte Register (STB) The Status Byte Register is the summary- level register in the status reporting structure. It contains summary bits that monitor activity in the other status registers and queues. The Status Byte Register is a live register. That is, its summary bits are set and cleared by the presence and absence of a summary bit from other event registers or queues.
9 Status Reporting The next program prints 0xD1 and clears bit 6 (RQS) and bit 4 (MAV) of the Status Byte Register. The difference in the output value between this example and the previous one is the value of bit 6 (weight = 64). Bit 6 is set when the first enabled summary bit is set and is cleared when the Status Byte Register is read by the serial poll command.
Status Reporting 9 Service Request Enable Register (SRE) Setting the Service Request Enable Register bits enable corresponding bits in the Status Byte Register. These enabled bits can then set RQS and MSS (bit 6) in the Status Byte Register. Bits are set in the Service Request Enable Register using the *SRE command and the bits that are set are read with the *SRE? query. Example The following example sets bit 4 (MAV) and bit 5 (ESB) in the Service Request Enable Register. myScope.
9 Status Reporting Trigger Event Register (TER) This register sets the TRG bit in the status byte when a trigger event occurs. The TER event register stays set until it is cleared by reading the register or using the *CLS command. If your application needs to detect multiple triggers, the TER event register must be cleared after each one. If you are using the Service Request to interrupt a program or controller operation, you must clear the event register each time the trigger bit is set.
Status Reporting 9 Output Queue The output queue stores the oscilloscope- to- controller responses that are generated by certain instrument commands and queries. The output queue generates the Message Available summary bit when the output queue contains one or more bytes. This summary bit sets the MAV bit (bit 4) in the Status Byte Register. When using the Agilent VISA COM library, the output queue may be read with the FormattedIO488 object's ReadString, ReadNumber, ReadList, or ReadIEEEBlock methods.
9 Status Reporting Message Queue The message queue contains the text of the last message written to the advisory line on the screen of the oscilloscope. The length of the oscilloscope's message queue is 1. Note that messages sent with the :SYSTem:DSP command do not set the MSG status bit in the Status Byte Register.
9 Status Reporting (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) The (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) monitors the following oscilloscope status events: • PON - Power On • URQ - User Request • CME - Command Error • EXE - Execution Error • DDE - Device Dependent Error • QYE - Query Error • RQC - Request Control • OPC - Operation Complete When one of these events occur, the event sets the corresponding bit in the register.
9 Status Reporting (Standard) Event Status Enable Register (ESE) To allow any of the (Standard) Event Status Register (ESR) bits to generate a summary bit, you must first enable that bit. Enable the bit by using the *ESE (Event Status Enable) common command to set the corresponding bit in the (Standard) Event Status Enable Register (ESE). Set bits are read with the *ESE? query. Example Suppose your application requires an interrupt whenever any type of error occurs.
Status Reporting 9 Error Queue As errors are detected, they are placed in an error queue. This queue is first in, first out. If the error queue overflows, the last error in the queue is replaced with error 350, Queue overflow. Any time the queue overflows, the least recent errors remain in the queue, and the most recent error is discarded. The length of the oscilloscope's error queue is 30 (29 positions for the error messages, and 1 position for the Queue overflow message).
9 Status Reporting Operation Status Event Register (:OPERegister[:EVENt]) The Operation Status Event Register register hosts these bits: Name Location Description RUN bit bit 3 Is set whenever the instrument goes from a stop state to a single or running state. WAIT TRIG bit bit 5 Is set by the Trigger Armed Event Register and indicates that the trigger is armed. MTE bit bit 9 Comes from the Mask Test Event Registers. OVLR bit bit 11 Is set whenever a 50 input overload occurs.
Status Reporting 9 Operation Status Condition Register (:OPERegister:CONDition) The Operation Status Condition Register register hosts these bits: Name Location Description RUN bit bit 3 Is set whenever the instrument is not stopped. WAIT TRIG bit bit 5 Is set by the Trigger Armed Event Register and indicates that the trigger is armed. MTE bit bit 9 Comes from the Mask Test Event Registers. OVLR bit bit 11 Is set whenever a 50 input overload occurs.
9 Status Reporting Arm Event Register (AER) This register sets bit 5 (Wait Trig bit) in the Operation Status Register and the OPER bit (bit 7) in the Status Byte Register when the instrument becomes armed. The ARM event register stays set until it is cleared by reading the register with the AER? query or using the *CLS command. If your application needs to detect multiple triggers, the ARM event register must be cleared after each one.
Status Reporting 9 Overload Event Register (:OVLRegister) The Overload Event Register register hosts these bits: Name Location Description Channel 1 OVL bit 0 Overload has occurred on Channel 1 input. Channel 2 OVL bit 1 Overload has occurred on Channel 2 input. Channel 3 OVL bit 2 Overload has occurred on Channel 3 input. Channel 4 OVL bit 3 Overload has occurred on Channel 4 input. External Trigger OVL bit 4 Overload has occurred on External Trigger input.
9 Status Reporting Hardware Event Event Register (:HWERegister[:EVENt]) This register hosts the PLL LOCKED bit (bit 12). • The PLL LOCKED bit (bit 12) is for internal use and is not intended for general use.
Status Reporting 9 Hardware Event Condition Register (:HWERegister:CONDition) This register hosts the PLL LOCKED bit (bit 12). • The :HWERegister:CONDition? query returns the value of the Hardware Event Condition Register. • The PLL LOCKED bit (bit 12) is for internal use and is not intended for general use.
9 Status Reporting Mask Test Event Event Register (:MTERegister[:EVENt]) The Mask Test Event Event Register register hosts these bits: Name Location Description Complete bit 0 Is set when the mask test is complete. Fail bit 1 Is set when there is a mask test failure. Started bit 8 Is set when mask testing is started. Auto Mask bit 10 Is set when auto mask creation is completed. The :MTERegister[:EVENt]? query returns the value of, and clears, the Mask Test Event Event Register.
Status Reporting 9 Clearing Registers and Queues The *CLS common command clears all event registers and all queues except the output queue. If *CLS is sent immediately after a program message terminator, the output queue is also cleared.
9 Status Reporting Status Reporting Decision Chart no Do you want to do status reporting? yes Reset the instrument and clear the status registers: myScope.WriteString "*RST" myScope.WriteString "*CLS" Do you want to send a Service Request (SRQ) interrupt to the controller? no (Your programs can read the status registers instead.
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronization in the Programming Flow 740 Blocking Synchronization 741 Polling Synchronization With Timeout 742 Synchronizing with a Single-Shot Device Under Test (DUT) 744 Synchronization with an Averaging Acquisition 746 When remotely controlling an oscilloscope with programming commands, it is often necessary to know when the oscilloscope has finished the previous operation and is ready for the next comma
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronization in the Programming Flow Most remote programming follows these three general steps: 1 Set up the oscilloscope and device under test (see page 740). 2 Acquire a waveform (see page 740). 3 Retrieve results (see page 740). Set Up the Oscilloscope Before making changes to the oscilloscope setup, it is best to make sure it is stopped using the :STOP command followed by the *OPC? query.
Synchronizing Acquisitions 10 Blocking Synchronization Use the :DIGitize command to start the acquisition. This blocks subsequent queries until the acquisition and processing is complete. For example: ' ' Synchronizing acquisition using blocking. ' =================================================================== Option Explicit Public Public Public Public myMgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager myScope As VisaComLib.
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Polling Synchronization With Timeout This example requires a timeout value so the operation can abort if an acquisition does not occur within the timeout period: ' ' Synchronizing acquisition using polling. ' =================================================================== Option Explicit Public Public Public Public myMgr As VisaComLib.ResourceManager myScope As VisaComLib.
Synchronizing Acquisitions 10 myScope.WriteString ":OPERegister:CONDition?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Mask RUN bit (bit 3, &H8). If (varQueryResult And &H8) = 0 Then Exit Do Else Sleep 100 ' Small wait to prevent excessive queries. lngElapsed = lngElapsed + 100 End If Loop ' Get results. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------If lngElapsed < lngTimeout Then myScope.WriteString ":MEASure:RISetime" myScope.WriteString ":MEASure:RISetime?" varQueryResult = myScope.
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronizing with a Single-Shot Device Under Test (DUT) The examples in "Blocking Synchronization" on page 741 and "Polling Synchronization With Timeout" on page 742 assume the DUT is continually running and therefore the oscilloscope will have more than one opportunity to trigger. With a single shot DUT, there is only one opportunity for the oscilloscope to trigger, so it is necessary for the oscilloscope to be armed and ready before the DUT is enabled.
Synchronizing Acquisitions 10 ' ----------------------------------------------------------------' Start a single acquisition. myScope.WriteString ":SINGle" ' Wait until the trigger system is armed. Do Sleep 100 ' Small wait to prevent excessive queries. myScope.WriteString ":AER?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber Loop Until varQueryResult = 1 ' Oscilloscope is armed and ready, enable DUT here. Debug.Print "Oscilloscope is armed and ready, enable DUT.
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions Synchronization with an Averaging Acquisition When averaging, it is necessary to know when the average count has been reached. The :SINGle command does not average. If it is known that a trigger will occur, a :DIGitize will acquire the complete number of averages, but if the number of averages is large, a timeout on the connection can occur. The example below polls during the :DIGitize to prevent a timeout on the connection. ' ' Synchronizing in averaging acquisition mode.
Synchronizing Acquisitions 10 ' Save *ESE (Standard Event Status Enable register) mask ' (so it can be restored later). Dim varInitialESE As Variant myScope.WriteString "*ESE?" varInitialESE = myScope.ReadNumber ' Set *ESE mask to allow only OPC (Operation Complete) bit. myScope.WriteString "*ESE " + CStr(CInt("&H01")) ' Acquire using :DIGitize. Set up OPC bit to be set when the ' operation is complete. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------myScope.
10 Synchronizing Acquisitions 748 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Command Classifications 750 Valid Command/Query Strings 751 Query Return Values 772 All Oscilloscope Commands Are Sequential 773 749
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Command Classifications To help you use existing programs with your oscilloscope, or use current programs with the next generation of Agilent InfiniiVision oscilloscopes, commands are classified by the following categories: • "Core Commands" on page 750 • "Non- Core Commands" on page 750 • "Obsolete Commands" on page 750 Core Commands Core commands are a common set of commands that provide basic oscilloscope functionality on this oscilloscope and future Agilent InfiniiV
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 Valid Command/Query Strings • "Program Message Syntax" on page 751 • "Command Tree" on page 755 • "Duplicate Mnemonics" on page 769 • "Tree Traversal Rules and Multiple Commands" on page 769 Program Message Syntax To program the instrument remotely, you must understand the command format and structure expected by the instrument. The IEEE 488.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Instruction Header The instruction header is one or more mnemonics separated by colons (:) that represent the operation to be performed by the instrument. The "Command Tree" on page 755 illustrates how all the mnemonics can be joined together to form a complete header. ":DISPlay:LABel ON" is a command. Queries are indicated by adding a question mark (?) to the end of the header, for example, ":DISPlay:LABel?".
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • When the command/keyword is longer than four characters, use the first four characters of the command/keyword unless the fourth character is a vowel; when the fourth character is a vowel, use the first three characters of the command/keyword. • When the command/keyword is four or fewer characters, use all of the characters.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands For example, :CHANnel1:BWLimit ON Common Command Headers Common command headers control IEEE 488.2 functions within the instrument (such as clear status). Their syntax is: * No space or separator is allowed between the asterisk (*) and the command header. *CLS is an example of a common command header. Program Data Syntax Rules Program data is used to convey a parameter information related to the command header.
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 When a syntax definition specifies that a number is an integer, that means that the number should be whole. Any fractional part will be ignored, truncating the number. Numeric data parameters accept fractional values are called real numbers. All numbers must be strings of ASCII characters. Thus, when sending the number 9, you would send a byte representing the ASCII code for the character 9 (which is 57).
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :OUTPut (see page 197) • :STARt (see page 198) • :STATus (see page 199) • :SWITch (see page 200) • :TEMPerature (see page 201) • :TIME (see page 202) • :CDISplay (see page 145) • :CHANnel (see page 203) • :BWLimit (see page 206) • :COUPling (see page 207) • :DISPlay (see page 208) • :IMPedance (see page 209) • :INVert (see page 210) • :LABel (see page 211) • :OFFSet (see page 212) • :PROBe (see page 213) • :HEAD[:TYPE] (see page 214) • :ID (see page 215) • :SKEW (se
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :BWLimit (see page 235) • :IMPedance (see page 236) • :PROBe (see page 237) • :ID (see page 238) • :STYPe (see page 239) • :PROTection (see page 240) • :RANGe (see page 241) • :UNITs (see page 242) • :FUNCtion (see page 243) • :CENTer (see page 246) • :DISPlay (see page 247) • :GOFT • :OPERation (see page 248) • :SOURce1 (see page 249) • :SOURce2 (see page 250) • :OFFSet (see page 251) • :OPERation (see page 252) • :RANGe (see page 253) • :REFerence (see page 254) • :
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :HWEenable (Hardware Event Enable Register) (see page 148) • :HWERegister • :CONDition (Hardware Event Condition Register) (see page 150) • [:EVENt] (Hardware Event Event Register) (see page 152) • :LISTer (see page 271) • :DATA (see page 272) • :DISPlay (see page 273) • :MARKer (see page 274) • :MODE (see page 276) • :X1Position (see page 277) • :X1Y1source (see page 278) • :X2Position (see page 279) • :X2Y2source (see page 280) • :XDELta (see page 281) • :Y1Position
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :SOURce (see page 315) • :STATistics (see page 317) • :INCRement (see page 318) • :RESet (see page 319) • :TEDGe (see page 320) • :TVALue (see page 322) • :VAMPlitude (see page 324) • :VAVerage (see page 325) • :VBASe (see page 326) • :VMAX (see page 327) • :VMIN (see page 328) • :VPP (see page 329) • :VRATio (see page 330) • :VRMS (see page 331) • :VTIMe (see page 332) • :VTOP (see page 333) • :WINDow (see page 334) • :XMAX (see page 335) • :XMIN (see page 336) • :ME
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :DELete (see page 352) • :ENABle (see page 353) • :LOCK (see page 354) • :OUTPut (see page 355) • :RMODe (see page 356) • :FACTion • :MEASure (see page 357) • :PRINt (see page 358) • :SAVE (see page 359) • :STOP (see page 360) • :SIGMa (see page 361) • :TIME (see page 362) • :WAVeforms (see page 363) • :SCALe • :BIND (see page 364) • :X1 (see page 365) • :XDELta (see page 366) • :Y1 (see page 367) • :Y2 (see page 368) • :SOURce (see page 369) • :TITLe (see page 370) •
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • [:STARt] (see page 376) • :RUN (see page 170) • :SAVE • :FILename (see page 379) • :IMAGe (see page 380) • [:STARt] (see page 380) • :AREA (see page 381) • :FACTors (see page 382) • :FORMat (see page 383) • :IGColors (see page 384) • :PALette (see page 385) • :LISTer (see page 386) • [:STARt] (see page 386) • :MASK (see page 387) • [:STARt] (see page 387) • :PWD (see page 388) • :SETup (see page 389) • [:STARt] (see page 389) • :WAVeform (see page 390) • [:STARt] (see
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :RESet (see page 403) • :SYNC? (see page 404) • :TOTal? (see page 405) • :I2S • :BASE (see page 406) • :IIC • :ASIZe (see page 407) • :LIN • :PARity (see page 408) • :M1553 • :BASE (see page 409) • :MODE (see page 410) • :SPI • :BITorder (see page 411) • :WIDTh (see page 412) • :UART • :BASE (see page 413) • :COUNt • :ERRor (see page 414) • :RESet (see page 415) • :RXFRames (see page 416) • :TXFRames (see page 417) • :FRAMing (see page 418) • :SERial (see page 171) • :
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :SETup (see page 426) • :TIME (see page 428) • :TER (Trigger Event Register) (see page 175) • :TIMebase (see page 429) • :MODE (see page 431) • :POSition (see page 432) • :RANGe (see page 433) • :REFerence (see page 434) • :SCALe (see page 435) • :VERNier (see page 436) • :WINDow • :POSition (see page 437) • :RANGe (see page 438) • :SCALe (see page 439) • :TRIGger (see page 440) • :HFReject (see page 444) • :HOLDoff (see page 445) • :LFIFty (see page 446) • :MODE (see
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :DURation (see page 464) • :GREaterthan (see page 465) • :LESSthan (see page 466) • :PATTern (see page 467) • :QUALifier (see page 468) • :RANGe (see page 469) • :EBURst (see page 470) • :COUNt (see page 471) • :IDLE (see page 472) • :SLOPe (see page 473) • [:EDGE] (see page 474) • :COUPling (see page 475) • :LEVel (see page 476) • :REJect (see page 477) • :SLOPe (see page 478) • :SOURce (see page 479) • :FLEXray (see page 480) • :AUToset (see page 481) • :BAUDrate (se
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :POLarity (see page 496) • :QUALifier (see page 497) • :RANGe (see page 498) • :SOURce (see page 499) • :HFReject (see page 444) • :HOLDoff (see page 445) • :I2S (see page 500) • :ALIGnment (see page 502) • :AUDio (see page 503) • :CLOCk • :SLOPe (see page 504) • :PATTern • :DATA (see page 505) • :FORMat (see page 507) • :RANGe (see page 508) • :RWIDth (see page 510) • :SOURce • :CLOCk (see page 511) • :DATA (see page 512) • :WSELect (see page 513) • :TRIGger (see pag
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :ID (see page 529) • :PATTern • :DATA (see page 530) • :LENGth (see page 532) • :FORMat (see page 533) • :SAMPlepoint (see page 534) • :SIGNal • :BAUDrate (see page 535) • :DEFinition (see page 705) • :SOURce (see page 536) • :STANdard (see page 537) • :SYNCbreak (see page 538) • :TRIGger (see page 539) • :M1553 (see page 540) • :AUTosetup (see page 541) • :PATTern • :DATA (see page 542) • :RTA (see page 543) • :SOURce • :LOWer (see page 544) • :UPPer (see page 545) •
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 • :SLOPe (see page 556) • :TIMeout (see page 557) • :FRAMing (see page 558) • :PATTern • :DATA (see page 559) • :WIDTh (see page 560) • :SOURce • :CLOCk (see page 561) • :DATA (see page 562) • :FRAMe (see page 563) • :SWEep (see page 451) • :TV (see page 564) • :LINE (see page 565) • :MODE (see page 566) • :POLarity (see page 567) • :SOURce (see page 568) • :STANdard (see page 569) • :TVMode (see page 706) • :UART (see page 570) • :BASE (see page 572) • :BAUDrate (see p
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • :DMINus (see page 586) • :DPLus (see page 587) • :SPEed (see page 588) • :TRIGger (see page 589) • :VIEW (see page 176) • :WAVeform (see page 590) • :BYTeorder (see page 597) • :COUNt (see page 598) • :DATA (see page 599) • :FORMat (see page 601) • :POINts (see page 602) • :MODE (see page 604) • :PREamble (see page 606) • :SEGMented • :COUNt (see page 609) • :TTAG (see page 610) • :SOURce (see page 611) • :SUBSource (see page 615) • :TYPE (see page 616) • :UNSigned (se
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands • *RST (see page 125) • *SAV (see page 128) • *SRE (see page 129) • *STB (see page 131) • *TRG (see page 133) • *TST (see page 134) • *WAI (see page 135) Duplicate Mnemonics Identical function mnemonics can be used in more than one subsystem. For example, the function mnemonic RANGe may be used to change the vertical range or to change the horizontal range: :CHANnel1:RANGe .4 Sets the vertical range of channel 1 to 0.4 volts full scale.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands The output statements in the examples are written using the Agilent VISA COM library in Visual Basic. The quoted string is placed on the bus, followed by a carriage return and linefeed (CRLF). To execute more than one function within the same subsystem, separate the functions with a semicolon (;): ::; For example: myScope.WriteString ":TIMebase:RANGe 0.
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 Multiple commands may be any combination of compound and simple commands.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands Query Return Values Command headers immediately followed by a question mark (?) are queries. Queries are used to get results of measurements made by the instrument or to find out how the instrument is currently configured. After receiving a query, the instrument interrogates the requested function and places the answer in its output queue. The answer remains in the output queue until it is read or another command is issued.
More About Oscilloscope Commands 11 All Oscilloscope Commands Are Sequential IEEE 488.2 makes the distinction between sequential and overlapped commands: • Sequential commands finish their task before the execution of the next command starts. • Overlapped commands run concurrently. Commands following an overlapped command may be started before the overlapped command is completed. All of the oscilloscope commands are sequential.
11 More About Oscilloscope Commands 774 Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide
Agilent InfiniiVision 5000 Series Oscilloscopes Programmer's Guide 12 Programming Examples VISA COM Examples 776 VISA Examples 809 SICL Examples 855 Example programs are ASCII text files that can be cut from the help file and pasted into your favorite text editor.
12 Programming Examples VISA COM Examples • "VISA COM Example in Visual Basic" on page 776 • "VISA COM Example in C#" on page 786 • "VISA COM Example in Visual Basic .NET" on page 798 VISA COM Example in Visual Basic To run this example in Visual Basic for Applications (VBA): 1 Start the application that provides Visual Basic for Applications (for example, Microsoft Excel). 2 Press ALT+F11 to launch the Visual Basic editor. 3 Reference the Agilent VISA COM library: a Choose Tools>References...
12 Programming Examples ' ' If you are using a different signal or different channels, these ' commands may not work as explained in the comments. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Sub Main() On Error GoTo VisaComError ' Create the VISA COM I/O resource. Set myMgr = New VisaComLib.ResourceManager Set myScope = New VisaComLib.FormattedIO488 ' GPIB. 'Set myScope.IO = myMgr.Open("GPIB0::7::INSTR") ' LAN. 'Set myScope.IO = myMgr.
12 Programming Examples ' There are also some additional initialization commands, which are ' not used, but shown for reference. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Initialize() On Error GoTo VisaComError ' Clear the interface. myScope.IO.Clear ' RESET - This command puts the oscilloscope into a known state. ' This statement is very important for programs to work as expected. ' Most of the following initialization commands are initialized by ' *RST.
Programming Examples 12 ' TRIGGER_EDGE_SLOPE - Sets the slope of the edge for the trigger. ' Set the slope to positive. myScope.WriteString ":TRIGGER:EDGE:SLOPE POSITIVE" ' The following commands are not executed and are shown for reference ' purposes only. To execute these commands, uncomment them. ' RUN_STOP - (not executed in this example) ' - RUN starts the acquisition of data for the active waveform ' display. ' - STOP stops the data acquisition and turns off AUTOSTORE. ' myScope.
12 Programming Examples ' ' NOTE! The DIGITIZE command is highly recommended for triggering ' modes other than SINGLE. This ensures that sufficient data is ' available for measurement. If DIGITIZE is used with single mode, ' the completion criteria may never be met. The number of points ' gathered in Single mode is related to the sweep speed, memory ' depth, and maximum sample rate.
12 Programming Examples Dim strPath As String strPath = "c:\scope\config\setup.dat" Close #1 ' If #1 is open, close it. ' Open file for output. Open strPath For Binary Access Write Lock Write As #1 Put #1, , varQueryResult ' Write data. Close #1 ' Close file. ' IMAGE_TRANSFER - In this example, we will query for the image data ' with ":DISPLAY:DATA?", read the data, and then save it to a file. Dim byteData() As Byte myScope.IO.Timeout = 15000 myScope.
12 Programming Examples ' Query for risetime. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:RISETIME?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Read risetime. MsgBox "Risetime:" + vbCrLf + _ FormatNumber(varQueryResult * 1000000, 4) + " us" ' Query for Peak to Peak voltage. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:VPP?" varQueryResult = myScope.ReadNumber ' Read VPP. MsgBox "Peak to peak voltage:" + vbCrLf + _ FormatNumber(varQueryResult, 4) + " V" ' Query for Vmax. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:VMAX?" varQueryResult = myScope.
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim XINCREMENT XORIGIN XREFERENCE YINCREMENT YORIGIN YREFERENCE 12 : float64 - time difference between data points. : float64 - always the first data point in memory. : int32 - specifies the data point associated with x-origin. : float32 - voltage difference between data points. : float32 - value is the voltage at center screen. : int32 - specifies the data point where y-origin occurs.
12 Programming Examples FormatNumber(sngYOrigin) + " V" + vbCrLf strOutput = strOutput + "Sec/Div = " + _ FormatNumber(lngPoints * dblXIncrement / 10 * _ 1000000) + " us" + vbCrLf strOutput = strOutput + "Delay = " + _ FormatNumber(((lngPoints / 2) * _ dblXIncrement + dblXOrigin) * 1000000) + " us" + vbCrLf ' QUERY_WAVE_DATA - Outputs waveform data that is stored in a buffer. ' Query the oscilloscope for the waveform data. myScope.
12 Programming Examples ' Query time at 1st rising edge on ch1. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:TEDGE? +1, CHAN1" ' Read time at edge 1 on ch 1. dblChan1Edge1 = myScope.ReadNumber ' Query time at 1st rising edge on ch2. myScope.WriteString ":MEASURE:TEDGE? +1, CHAN2" ' Read time at edge 1 on ch 2. dblChan2Edge1 = myScope.ReadNumber ' Calculate delay time between ch1 and ch2. dblDelay = dblChan2Edge1 - dblChan1Edge1 ' Write calculated delay time to screen.
12 Programming Examples myScope.FlushWrite (False) myScope.FlushRead End If Exit Sub VisaComError: MsgBox "VISA COM Error: " + vbCrLf + Err.Description End Sub VISA COM Example in C# To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual C#, Windows, Console Application project. 3 Cut- and- paste the code that follows into the C# source file. 4 Edit the program to use the VISA address of your oscilloscope. 5 Add a reference to the VISA COM 3.
12 Programming Examples private static VisaComInstrument myScope; public static void Main(string[] args) { try { myScope = new VisaComInstrument("USB0::2391::5957::MY47250010::0::INSTR"); Initialize(); /* The extras function contains miscellaneous commands that * do not need to be executed for the proper operation of * this example. The commands in the extras function are * shown for reference purposes only. */ // Extra(); // Uncomment to execute the extra function. Capture(); Analyze(); } catch (System.
12 Programming Examples myScope.DoCommand("*CLS"); // Clear the status data structures. /* IDN - Ask for the device's *IDN string. */ strResults = myScope.DoQueryString("*IDN?"); // Display results. Console.Write("Result is: {0}", strResults); /* AUTOSCALE - This command evaluates all the input signals * and sets the correct conditions to display all of the * active signals. */ myScope.DoCommand(":AUToscale"); /* CHANNEL_PROBE - Sets the probe attenuation factor for the * selected channel.
Programming Examples 12 * Extra() * -------------------------------------------------------------* The commands in this function are not executed and are shown * for reference purposes only. To execute these commands, call * this function from main. */ private static void Extra() { /* RUN_STOP (not executed in this example): * - RUN starts the acquisition of data for the active * waveform display. * - STOP stops the data acquisition and turns off AUTOSTORE. */ myScope.DoCommand(":RUN"); myScope.
12 Programming Examples /* NOTE! The use of the DIGITIZE command is highly recommended * as it will ensure that sufficient data is available for * measurement. Keep in mind when the oscilloscope is running, * communication with the computer interrupts data acquisition. * Setting up the oscilloscope over the bus causes the data * buffers to be cleared and internal hardware to be * reconfigured.
Programming Examples 12 byte[] DataArray; // Read setup string from file. DataArray = File.ReadAllBytes("c:\\scope\\config\\setup.dat"); Console.WriteLine("Read setup string ({0} bytes) from file.", DataArray.Length); // Restore setup string. myScope.DoCommandIEEEBlock(":SYSTem:SETup", DataArray); Console.WriteLine("Restored setup string."); /* IMAGE_TRANSFER - In this example, we query for the screen * data with the ":DISPLAY:DATA?" query. The .
12 Programming Examples * obtain waveform data, you must specify the WAVEFORM * parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query. * * Once these parameters have been sent, the * ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" query provides information concerning * the vertical and horizontal scaling of the waveform data. * * With the preamble information you can then use the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query and read the data block in the * correct format.
Programming Examples 12 Console.WriteLine("Preamble TYPE: {0:e}", fType); double fPoints = fResultsArray[2]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble POINts: {0:e}", fPoints); double fCount = fResultsArray[3]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble COUNt: {0:e}", fCount); double fXincrement = fResultsArray[4]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble XINCrement: {0:e}", fXincrement); double fXorigin = fResultsArray[5]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble XORigin: {0:e}", fXorigin); double fXreference = fResultsArray[6]; Console.
12 Programming Examples double double double double fVdiv = 32 * fYincrement; fOffset = fYorigin; fSdiv = fPoints * fXincrement / 10; fDelay = (fPoints / 2) * fXincrement + fXorigin; // Print them out... Console.WriteLine("Scope Settings for Channel 1:"); Console.WriteLine("Volts per Division = {0:f}", fVdiv); Console.WriteLine("Offset = {0:f}", fOffset); Console.WriteLine("Seconds per Division = {0:e}", fSdiv); Console.
Programming Examples 12 // Clear the interface. m_IoObject.IO.Clear(); } public void DoCommand(string strCommand) { // Send the command. m_IoObject.WriteString(strCommand, true); // Check for instrument errors. CheckForInstrumentErrors(strCommand); } public string DoQueryString(string strQuery) { // Send the query. m_IoObject.WriteString(strQuery, true); // Get the result string. string strResults; strResults = m_IoObject.ReadString(); // Check for instrument errors.
12 Programming Examples // Check for instrument errors. CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery); // Return result numbers. return fResultsArray; } public byte[] DoQueryIEEEBlock(string strQuery) { // Send the query. m_IoObject.WriteString(strQuery, true); // Get the results array. byte[] ResultsArray; ResultsArray = (byte[])m_IoObject.ReadIEEEBlock( IEEEBinaryType.BinaryType_UI1, false, true); // Check for instrument errors. CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery); // Return results array.
Programming Examples 12 } } while (strInstrumentError.ToString() != "+0,\"No error\"\n"); } private void OpenIo() { m_ResourceManager = new ResourceManagerClass(); m_IoObject = new FormattedIO488Class(); // Open the default VISA COM IO object. try { m_IoObject.IO = (IMessage)m_ResourceManager.Open(m_strVisaAddress, AccessMode.NO_LOCK, 0, ""); } catch (Exception e) { Console.WriteLine("An error occurred: {0}", e.Message); } } public void SetTimeoutSeconds(int nSeconds) { m_IoObject.IO.
12 Programming Examples VISA COM Example in Visual Basic .NET To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual Basic, Windows, Console Application project. 3 Cut- and- paste the code that follows into the C# source file. 4 Edit the program to use the VISA address of your oscilloscope. 5 Add a reference to the VISA COM 3.
12 Programming Examples ' do not need to be executed for the proper operation of ' this example. The commands in the extras function are ' shown for reference purposes only. ' Extra(); // Uncomment to execute the extra function. Capture() Analyze() Catch err As System.ApplicationException Console.WriteLine("*** VISA Error Message : " + err.Message) Catch err As System.SystemException Console.WriteLine("*** System Error Message : " + err.Message) Catch err As System.Exception System.Diagnostics.Debug.
12 Programming Examples ' The range value is eight times the volts per division. myScope.DoCommand(":CHANnel1:RANGe 8") ' TIME_RANGE - Sets the full scale horizontal time in seconds. ' The range value is ten times the time per division. myScope.DoCommand(":TIMebase:RANGe 2e-3") ' TIME_REFERENCE - Possible values are LEFT and CENTER: ' - LEFT sets the display reference one time division from ' the left. ' - CENTER sets the display reference to the center of the ' screen. myScope.
Programming Examples 12 ' TIME_MODE (not executed in this example) - Set the time base ' mode to MAIN, DELAYED, XY or ROLL. ' myScope.DoCommand(":TIMebase:MODE MAIN") End Sub ' ' ' ' Capture() -------------------------------------------------------------This function prepares the scope for data acquisition and then uses the DIGITIZE MACRO to capture some data. Private Shared Sub Capture() ' AQUIRE_TYPE - Sets the acquisition mode. There are three ' acquisition types NORMAL, PEAK, or AVERAGE. myScope.
12 Programming Examples Dim nBytes As Integer ' SAVE_SYSTEM_SETUP - The :SYSTem:SETup? query returns a ' program message that contains the current state of the ' instrument. Its format is a definite-length binary block, ' for example, ' #800002204 ' where the setup string is 2204 bytes in length. Console.WriteLine("Saving oscilloscope setup to " + _ "c:\scope\config\setup.dat") If File.Exists("c:\scope\config\setup.dat") Then File.Delete("c:\scope\config\setup.
Programming Examples 12 Console.WriteLine("Wrote screen image ({0} bytes) to file.", _ nBytes) ' Return I/O timeout to five seconds. myScope.SetTimeoutSeconds(5) ' MEASURE - The commands in the MEASURE subsystem are used to ' make measurements on displayed waveforms. ' Set source to measure. myScope.DoCommand(":MEASure:SOURce CHANnel1") ' Query for frequency. Dim fResults As Double fResults = myScope.DoQueryValue(":MEASure:FREQuency?") Console.
12 Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' COUNT : int32 - 1 and is always 1. XINCREMENT : float64 - time difference between data points. XORIGIN : float64 - always the first data point in memory. XREFERENCE : int32 - specifies the data point associated with the x-origin. YINCREMENT : float32 - voltage difference between data points. YORIGIN : float32 - value of the voltage at center screen. YREFERENCE : int32 - data point where y-origin occurs. Console.WriteLine("Reading preamble.
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 12 Where: = #800002048 (this is an example header) The "#8" may be stripped off of the header and the remaining numbers are the size, in bytes, of the waveform data block. The size can vary depending on the number of points acquired for the waveform which can be set using the ":WAVEFORM:POINTS" command. You may then read that number of bytes from the oscilloscope; then, read the following NL character to terminate the query. ' Read waveform data.
12 Programming Examples "c:\scope\data\waveform.csv.", nBytes) End Sub End Class Class VisaComInstrument Private m_ResourceManager As ResourceManagerClass Private m_IoObject As FormattedIO488Class Private m_strVisaAddress As String ' Constructor. Public Sub New(ByVal strVisaAddress As String) ' Save VISA address in member variable. m_strVisaAddress = strVisaAddress ' Open the default VISA COM IO object. OpenIo() ' Clear the interface. m_IoObject.IO.
Programming Examples 12 Return fResult End Function Public Function DoQueryValues(ByVal strQuery As String) As Double() ' Send the query. m_IoObject.WriteString(strQuery, True) ' Get the result numbers. Dim fResultsArray As Double() fResultsArray = _ m_IoObject.ReadList(IEEEASCIIType.ASCIIType_R8, ",;") ' Check for instrument errors. CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery) ' Return result numbers.
12 Programming Examples ' If there is an error, print it. If strInstrumentError.ToString() <> "+0,""No error""" _ & Chr(10) & "" Then If bFirstError Then ' Print the command that caused the error. Console.WriteLine("ERROR(s) for command '{0}': ", _ strCommand) bFirstError = False End If Console.Write(strInstrumentError) End If Loop While strInstrumentError.
Programming Examples 12 VISA Examples • "VISA Example in C" on page 809 • "VISA Example in Visual Basic" on page 818 • "VISA Example in C#" on page 828 • "VISA Example in Visual Basic .NET" on page 841 VISA Example in C To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual C++, Win32, Win32 Console Application project. 3 In the Win32 Application Wizard, click Next >. Then, check Empty project, and click Finish.
12 Programming Examples * This program illustrates most of the commonly-used programming * features of your Agilent oscilloscope. * This program is to be built as a WIN32 console application. * Edit the RESOURCE line to specify the address of the * applicable device. */ #include #include /* For printf(). */ /* Agilent VISA routines.
Programming Examples 12 * The commands in the extras function are shown for reference * purposes only. */ /* extra(); */ /* <-- Uncomment to execute the extra function */ capture(); analyze(); /* Close session */ viClose(vi); viClose(defaultRM); printf ("Program execution is complete...\n"); } /* * initialize * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function initializes both the interface and the oscilloscope * to a known state.
12 Programming Examples * The range value is ten times the time per division. */ viPrintf(vi, ":TIM:RANG 2e-3\n"); /* TIME_REFERENCE - Possible values are LEFT and CENTER: * - LEFT sets the display reference one time division from the * left. * - CENTER sets the display reference to the center of the screen. */ viPrintf(vi, ":TIMEBASE:REFERENCE CENTER\n"); /* TRIGGER_SOURCE - Selects the channel that actually produces the * TV trigger. Any channel can be selected.
12 Programming Examples viPrintf(vi, ":TIMEBASE:MODE MAIN\n"); } /* * capture * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function prepares the scope for data acquisition and then * uses the DIGITIZE MACRO to capture some data. */ void capture (void) { /* AQUIRE_TYPE - Sets the acquisition mode. There are three * acquisition types NORMAL, PEAK, or AVERAGE.
12 Programming Examples int i; /* Loop counter. */ unsigned char setup_string[SETUP_STR_SIZE]; /* Array for setup string. */ int setup_size; FILE *fp; unsigned char image_data[IMG_SIZE]; /* Array for image data. */ int img_size; /* SAVE_SYSTEM_SETUP - The :SYSTEM:SETUP? query returns a program * message that contains the current state of the instrument. Its * format is a definite-length binary block, for example, * #800002204 * where the setup string is 2204 bytes in length.
Programming Examples 12 /* MEASURE - The commands in the MEASURE subsystem are used to * make measurements on displayed waveforms. */ /* Set source to measure. */ viPrintf(vi, ":MEASURE:SOURCE CHANNEL1\n"); /* Query for frequency. */ viQueryf(vi, ":MEASURE:FREQUENCY?\n", "%lf", &frequency); printf("The frequency is: %.4f kHz\n", frequency / 1000); /* Query for peak to peak voltage. */ viQueryf(vi, ":MEASURE:VPP?\n", "%lf", &vpp); printf("The peak to peak voltage is: %.
12 Programming Examples * * Once these parameters have been sent, the ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" * query provides information concerning the vertical and horizontal * scaling of the waveform data. * * With the preamble information you can then use the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query and read the data block in the * correct format. */ /* WAVE_FORMAT - Sets the data transmission mode for waveform data * output.
Programming Examples 12 * specified with the ":WAVEFORM:SOURCE" command. */ viPrintf(vi, ":WAVEFORM:DATA?\n"); /* Query waveform data. */ /* READ_WAVE_DATA - The wave data consists of two parts: the header, * and the actual waveform data followed by an New Line (NL) * character.
12 Programming Examples * retrieve_waveform * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function retrieves previously saved waveform data from a * file called "wave.dat". */ void retrieve_waveform(void) { FILE *fp; fp = fopen("c:\\scope\\data\\wave.dat", "rb"); /* Read preamble. */ fread(preamble, sizeof(preamble[0]), 10, fp); /* Read the waveform data.
Programming Examples 12 ' Declare variables to hold numeric values returned by ' viVScanf/viVQueryf. Public dblQueryResult As Double Public Const ByteArraySize = 5000000 Public retCount As Long Public byteArray(ByteArraySize) As Byte Public paramsArray(2) As Long Public Const DblArraySize = 20 Public dblArray(DblArraySize) As Double ' Declare fixed length string variable to hold string value returned ' by viVScanf/viVQueryf. Public strQueryResult As String * 200 ' For Sleep subroutine.
12 Programming Examples ' Get and display the device's *IDN? string. strQueryResult = DoQueryString("*IDN?") MsgBox "*IDN? string: " + strQueryResult, vbOKOnly, "*IDN? Result" ' Clear status and load the default setup. DoCommand "*CLS" DoCommand "*RST" End Sub ' ' Capture the waveform. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Capture() ' Set probe attenuation factor (from 0.1 to 1000).
Programming Examples 12 ' Open file for output. Dim hFile As Long hFile = FreeFile Open strPath For Binary Access Write Lock Write As hFile Dim lngI As Long For lngI = 0 To lngSetupStringSize - 1 Put hFile, , byteArray(lngI) ' Write data. Next lngI Close hFile ' Close file. ' Change settings with individual commands: ' ----------------------------------------------------------------' Set vertical scale and offset. DoCommand ":CHANnel1:SCALe 0.05" Debug.
12 Programming Examples ' Analyze the captured waveform. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Analyze() ' Make a couple of measurements. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------DoCommand ":MEASure:SOURce CHANnel1" Debug.
Programming Examples 12 Debug.Print "Waveform points desired: " + _ DoQueryString(":WAVeform:POINts?") ' Set the waveform source. DoCommand ":WAVeform:SOURce CHANnel1" Debug.Print "Waveform source: " + _ DoQueryString(":WAVeform:SOURce?") ' Choose the format of the data returned (WORD, BYTE, ASCII): DoCommand ":WAVeform:FORMat BYTE" Debug.
12 Programming Examples FormatNumber(lngPoints, 0) Debug.Print "Waveform average count: " + _ FormatNumber(lngCount, 0) Debug.Print "Waveform X increment: " + _ Format(dblXIncrement, "Scientific") Debug.Print "Waveform X origin: " + _ Format(dblXOrigin, "Scientific") Debug.Print "Waveform X reference: " + _ FormatNumber(lngXReference, 0) Debug.Print "Waveform Y increment: " + _ Format(sngYIncrement, "Scientific") Debug.Print "Waveform Y origin: " + _ Format(sngYOrigin, "Scientific") Debug.
Programming Examples 12 err = viVPrintf(vi, command + vbLf, 0) If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi CheckInstrumentErrors End Sub Private Function DoCommandIEEEBlock(command As String, _ lngBlockSize As Long) retCount = lngBlockSize Dim strCommandAndLength As String strCommandAndLength = command + " %#" + _ Format(lngBlockSize) + "b" err = viVPrintf(vi, strCommandAndLength + vbLf, paramsArray(1)) If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi DoCommandIEEEBlock = retCount CheckInstrumentErrors E
12 Programming Examples Private Function DoQueryNumbers(query As String) As Long Dim dblResult As Double ' Send query. err = viVPrintf(vi, query + vbLf, 0) If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi ' Set up paramsArray for multiple parameter query returning array. paramsArray(0) = VarPtr(retCount) paramsArray(1) = VarPtr(dblArray(0)) ' Set retCount to max number of elements array can hold. retCount = DblArraySize ' Read numbers.
12 Programming Examples Private Sub CheckInstrumentErrors() On Error GoTo ErrorHandler Dim strErrVal As String * 200 Dim strOut As String err = viVPrintf(vi, ":SYSTem:ERRor?" + vbLf, 0) If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi ' Query any errors. err = viVScanf(vi, "%t", strErrVal) ' Read: Errnum,"Error String". If (err <> VI_SUCCESS) Then HandleVISAError vi While Val(strErrVal) <> 0 ' End if find: 0,"No Error".
12 Programming Examples End Sub VISA Example in C# To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual C#, Windows, Console Application project. 3 Cut- and- paste the code that follows into the C# source file. 4 Edit the program to use the VISA address of your oscilloscope.
Programming Examples 12 { try { oscp = new VisaInstrument("USB0::2391::5957::MY47250010::0::INSTR"); Initialize(); /* The extras function contains miscellaneous commands that * do not need to be executed for the proper operation of * this example. The commands in the extras function are * shown for reference purposes only. */ // Extra(); // Uncomment to execute the extra function. Capture(); Analyze(); } catch (System.ApplicationException err) { Console.WriteLine("*** VISA Error Message : " + err.
12 Programming Examples */ strResults = oscp.DoQueryString("*IDN?"); // Display results. Console.Write("Result is: {0}", strResults); /* AUTOSCALE - This command evaluates all the input signals * and sets the correct conditions to display all of the * active signals. */ oscp.DoCommand(":AUToscale"); /* CHANNEL_PROBE - Sets the probe attenuation factor for the * selected channel. The probe attenuation factor may be from * 0.1 to 1000. */ oscp.
Programming Examples 12 * for reference purposes only. To execute these commands, call * this function from main. */ private static void Extra() { /* RUN_STOP (not executed in this example): * - RUN starts the acquisition of data for the active * waveform display. * - STOP stops the data acquisition and turns off AUTOSTORE. */ oscp.DoCommand(":RUN"); oscp.DoCommand(":STOP"); /* VIEW_BLANK (not executed in this example): * - VIEW turns on (starts displaying) an active channel or * pixel memory.
12 Programming Examples * communication with the computer interrupts data acquisition. * Setting up the oscilloscope over the bus causes the data * buffers to be cleared and internal hardware to be * reconfigured. * If a measurement is immediately requested there may not have * been enough time for the data acquisition process to collect * data and the results may not be accurate. An error value of * 9.9E+37 may be returned over the bus in this situation. */ oscp.
Programming Examples 12 // Read setup string from file. DataArray = File.ReadAllBytes("c:\\scope\\config\\setup.dat"); Console.WriteLine("Read setup string ({0} bytes) from file.", DataArray.Length); // Restore setup string. nBytesWritten = oscp.DoCommandIEEEBlock(":SYSTem:SETup", DataArray); Console.WriteLine("Restored setup string ({0} bytes).", nBytesWritten); /* IMAGE_TRANSFER - In this example, we query for the screen * data with the ":DISPLAY:DATA?" query. The .
12 Programming Examples * parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query. * * Once these parameters have been sent, the * ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" query provides information concerning * the vertical and horizontal scaling of the waveform data. * * With the preamble information you can then use the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query and read the data block in the * correct format. */ /* WAVE_FORMAT - Sets the data transmission mode for waveform * data output.
Programming Examples 12 double fPoints = fResultsArray[2]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble POINts: {0:e}", fPoints); double fCount = fResultsArray[3]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble COUNt: {0:e}", fCount); double fXincrement = fResultsArray[4]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble XINCrement: {0:e}", fXincrement); double fXorigin = fResultsArray[5]; Console.WriteLine("Preamble XORigin: {0:e}", fXorigin); double fXreference = fResultsArray[6]; Console.
12 Programming Examples double fOffset = fYorigin; double fSdiv = fPoints * fXincrement / 10; double fDelay = (fPoints / 2) * fXincrement + fXorigin; // Print them out... Console.WriteLine("Scope Settings for Channel 1:"); Console.WriteLine("Volts per Division = {0:f}", fVdiv); Console.WriteLine("Offset = {0:f}", fOffset); Console.WriteLine("Seconds per Division = {0:e}", fSdiv); Console.
Programming Examples 12 } public void DoCommand(string strCommand) { // Send the command. VisaSendCommandOrQuery(strCommand); // Check for instrument errors (another command and result). CheckForInstrumentErrors(strCommand); } public int DoCommandIEEEBlock(string strCommand, byte[] DataArray) { // Send the command to the device. string strCommandAndLength; int nViStatus, nLength, nBytesWritten; nLength = DataArray.Length; strCommandAndLength = String.
12 Programming Examples public double DoQueryValue(string strQuery) { // Send the query. VisaSendCommandOrQuery(strQuery); // Get the result string. double fResults; fResults = VisaGetResultValue(); // Check for instrument errors (another command and result). CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery); // Return string results. return fResults; } public double[] DoQueryValues(string strQuery) { // Send the query. VisaSendCommandOrQuery(strQuery); // Get the result string.
Programming Examples 12 strInstrumentError = VisaGetResultString(); if (strInstrumentError.ToString() != "+0,\"No error\"\n") { if (bFirstError) { Console.WriteLine("ERROR(s) for command '{0}': ", strCommand); bFirstError = false; } Console.Write(strInstrumentError); } } while (strInstrumentError.ToString() != "+0,\"No error\"\n"); } private void VisaSendCommandOrQuery(string strCommandOrQuery) { // Send command or query to the device. string strWithNewline; strWithNewline = String.
12 Programming Examples fResultsArray); CheckVisaStatus(nViStatus); return fResultsArray; } private int VisaGetResultIEEEBlock(out byte[] ResultsArray) { // Results array, big enough to hold a PNG. ResultsArray = new byte[300000]; int length; // Number of bytes returned from instrument. // Set the default number of bytes that will be contained in // the ResultsArray to 300,000 (300kB). length = 300000; // Read return value string from the device. int nViStatus; nViStatus = visa32.
Programming Examples 12 public void CheckVisaStatus(int nViStatus) { // If VISA error, throw exception. if (nViStatus < visa32.VI_SUCCESS) { StringBuilder strError = new StringBuilder(256); visa32.viStatusDesc(this.m_nResourceManager, nViStatus, strError); throw new ApplicationException(strError.ToString()); } } public void Close() { if (m_nSession != 0) visa32.viClose(m_nSession); if (m_nResourceManager != 0) visa32.viClose(m_nResourceManager); } } } VISA Example in Visual Basic .
12 Programming Examples 6 Build and run the program. For more information, see the tutorial on using VISA in Microsoft .NET in the VISA Help that comes with Agilent IO Libraries Suite 15. ' ' ' ' ' ' Agilent VISA Example in Visual Basic .NET ------------------------------------------------------------------This program illustrates most of the commonly-used programming features of your Agilent oscilloscope. ------------------------------------------------------------------- Imports System Imports System.
Programming Examples 12 Private Shared Sub Initialize() Dim strResults As StringBuilder ' ' ' ' ' ' RESET - This command puts the oscilloscope into a known state. This statement is very important for programs to work as expected. Most of the following initialization commands are initialized by *RST. It is not necessary to reinitialize them unless the default setting is not suitable for your application. ' Reset the to the defaults. oscp.DoCommand("*RST") ' Clear the status data structures. oscp.
12 Programming Examples oscp.DoCommand(":TRIGger:EDGE:SLOPe POSitive") End Sub ' ' ' ' ' Extra() -------------------------------------------------------------The commands in this function are not executed and are shown for reference purposes only. To execute these commands, call this function from main. Private Shared Sub Extra() ' RUN_STOP (not executed in this example): ' - RUN starts the acquisition of data for the active ' waveform display.
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 12 as it will ensure that sufficient data is available for measurement. Keep in mind when the oscilloscope is running, communication with the computer interrupts data acquisition. Setting up the oscilloscope over the bus causes the data buffers to be cleared and internal hardware to be reconfigured. If a measurement is immediately requested there may not have been enough time for the data acquisition process to collect data and the results may not be accurate.
12 Programming Examples ' Read setup string from file. DataArray = File.ReadAllBytes("c:\scope\config\setup.dat") Console.WriteLine("Read setup string ({0} bytes) from file.", _ DataArray.Length) ' Restore setup string. nBytesWritten = oscp.DoCommandIEEEBlock(":SYSTem:SETup", _ DataArray) Console.WriteLine("Restored setup string ({0} bytes).", _ nBytesWritten) ' IMAGE_TRANSFER - In this example, we query for the screen ' data with the ":DISPLAY:DATA?" query. The .
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query. ' ' ' ' WAVE_FORMAT - Sets the data transmission mode for waveform data output. This command controls how the data is formatted when sent from the oscilloscope and can be set to WORD or BYTE format. 12 Once these parameters have been sent, the ":WAVEFORM:PREAMBLE?" query provides information concerning the vertical and horizontal scaling of the waveform data.
12 Programming Examples Dim fCount As Double = fResultsArray(3) Console.WriteLine("Preamble COUNt: {0:e}", fCount) Dim fXincrement As Double = fResultsArray(4) Console.WriteLine("Preamble XINCrement: {0:e}", fXincrement) Dim fXorigin As Double = fResultsArray(5) Console.WriteLine("Preamble XORigin: {0:e}", fXorigin) Dim fXreference As Double = fResultsArray(6) Console.WriteLine("Preamble XREFerence: {0:e}", fXreference) Dim fYincrement As Double = fResultsArray(7) Console.
Programming Examples 12 Console.WriteLine("Offset = {0:f}", fOffset) Console.WriteLine("Seconds per Division = {0:e}", fSdiv) Console.WriteLine("Delay = {0:e}", fDelay) ' Print the waveform voltage at selected points: Dim i As Integer = 0 While i < 1000 Console.
12 Programming Examples ' Check for instrument errors (another command and result). CheckForInstrumentErrors(strCommand) End Sub Public Function DoCommandIEEEBlock(ByVal strCommand As String, _ ByVal DataArray As Byte()) As Integer ' Send the command to the device. Dim strCommandAndLength As String Dim nViStatus As Integer Dim nLength As Integer Dim nBytesWritten As Integer nLength = DataArray.Length strCommandAndLength = [String].
Programming Examples 12 Dim fResults As Double fResults = VisaGetResultValue() ' Check for instrument errors (another command and result). CheckForInstrumentErrors(strQuery) ' Return string results. Return fResults End Function Public Function DoQueryValues(ByVal strQuery As String) As Double() ' Send the query. VisaSendCommandOrQuery(strQuery) ' Get the result string. Dim fResultsArray As Double() fResultsArray = VisaGetResultValues() ' Check for instrument errors (another command and result).
12 Programming Examples Console.Write(strInstrumentError) End If Loop While strInstrumentError.ToString() <> _ "+0,""No error""" & Chr(10) & "" End Sub Private Sub VisaSendCommandOrQuery(ByVal strCommandOrQuery _ As String) ' Send command or query to the device. Dim strWithNewline As String strWithNewline = [String].Format("{0}" & Chr(10) & "", _ strCommandOrQuery) Dim nViStatus As Integer nViStatus = visa32.
Programming Examples 12 ' Number of bytes returned from instrument. ' Set the default number of bytes that will be contained in ' the ResultsArray to 300,000 (300kB). length = 300000 ' Read return value string from the device. Dim nViStatus As Integer nViStatus = visa32.viScanf(m_nSession, "%#b", length, _ ResultsArray) CheckVisaStatus(nViStatus) ' Write and read buffers need to be flushed after IEEE block? nViStatus = visa32.viFlush(m_nSession, visa32.
12 Programming Examples If m_nResourceManager <> 0 Then visa32.
Programming Examples 12 SICL Examples • "SICL Example in C" on page 855 • "SICL Example in Visual Basic" on page 864 SICL Example in C To compile and run this example in Microsoft Visual Studio 2005: 1 Open Visual Studio. 2 Create a new Visual C++, Win32, Win32 Console Application project. 3 In the Win32 Application Wizard, click Next >. Then, check Empty project, and click Finish. 4 Cut- and- paste the code that follows into a file named "example.c" in the project directory.
12 Programming Examples * Edit the DEVICE_ADDRESS line to specify the address of the * applicable device. */ #include #include "sicl.h" /* For printf(). */ /* SICL routines.
Programming Examples 12 /* Clear the interface. */ iclear(id); iremote(id); } initialize(); /* The extras function contains miscellaneous commands that do not * need to be executed for the proper operation of this example. * The commands in the extras function are shown for reference * purposes only. */ /* extra(); */ /* <-- Uncomment to execute the extra function */ capture(); analyze(); /* Close the device session to the instrument. */ iclose(id); printf ("Program execution is complete...
12 Programming Examples */ iprintf(id, ":AUTOSCALE\n"); /* CHANNEL_PROBE - Sets the probe attenuation factor for the * selected channel. The probe attenuation factor may be from * 0.1 to 1000. */ iprintf(id, ":CHAN1:PROBE 10\n"); /* CHANNEL_RANGE - Sets the full scale vertical range in volts. * The range value is eight times the volts per division. */ iprintf(id, ":CHANNEL1:RANGE 8\n"); /* TIME_RANGE - Sets the full scale horizontal time in seconds. * The range value is ten times the time per division.
Programming Examples 12 iprintf(id, ":RUN\n"); iprintf(id, ":STOP\n"); /* VIEW_BLANK (not executed in this example): * - VIEW turns on (starts displaying) an active channel or pixel * memory. * - BLANK turns off (stops displaying) a specified channel or * pixel memory. */ iprintf(id, ":BLANK CHANNEL1\n"); iprintf(id, ":VIEW CHANNEL1\n"); /* TIME_MODE (not executed in this example) - Set the time base * mode to MAIN, DELAYED, XY or ROLL.
12 Programming Examples /* * analyze * -----------------------------------------------------------------* In this example we will do the following: * - Save the system setup to a file for restoration at a later time. * - Save the oscilloscope display to a file which can be printed. * - Make single channel measurements. */ void analyze (void) { double frequency, vpp; /* Measurements. */ double vdiv, off, sdiv, delay; /* Calculated from preamble data. */ int i; /* Loop counter. */ /* Array for setup string.
12 Programming Examples itimeout(id, 30000); printf("Transferring image to c:\\scope\\data\\screen.bmp\n"); img_size = IMG_SIZE; ipromptf(id, ":DISPLAY:DATA? BMP8bit, SCREEN, COLOR\n", "%#b\n", &img_size, image_data); printf("Read display data query (%d bytes).\n", img_size); /* Write image data to file. */ fp = fopen ("c:\\scope\\data\\screen.bmp", "wb"); img_size = fwrite(image_data, sizeof(unsigned char), img_size, fp); fclose (fp); printf("Wrote image data (%d bytes) to file.
12 Programming Examples * get_waveform * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function transfers the data displayed on the oscilloscope to * the computer for storage, plotting, or further analysis. */ void get_waveform (void) { int waveform_size; /* WAVEFORM_DATA - To obtain waveform data, you must specify the * WAVEFORM parameters for the waveform data prior to sending the * ":WAVEFORM:DATA?" query.
Programming Examples printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble printf("Preamble */ 12 TYPE: %e\n", preamble[1]); POINTS: %e\n", preamble[2]); COUNT: %e\n", preamble[3]); XINCREMENT: %e\n", preamble[4]); XORIGIN: %e\n", preamble[5]); XREFERENCE: %e\n", preamble[6]); YINCREMENT: %e\n", preamble[7]); YORIGIN: %e\n", preamble[8]); YREFERENCE: %e\n", preamble[9]); /* QUERY_WAVE_DATA - Outputs waveform records to the
12 Programming Examples { FILE *fp; fp = fopen("c:\\scope\\data\\wave.dat", "wb"); /* Write preamble. */ fwrite(preamble, sizeof(preamble[0]), 10, fp); /* Write actually waveform data. */ fwrite(waveform_data, sizeof(waveform_data[0]), (int)preamble[2], fp); fclose (fp); } /* * retrieve_waveform * -----------------------------------------------------------------* This function retrieves previously saved waveform data from a * file called "wave.dat".
Programming Examples ' ' ' ' ' ' 12 Agilent SICL Example in Visual Basic ------------------------------------------------------------------This program illustrates a few commonly-used programming features of your Agilent oscilloscope. ------------------------------------------------------------------- Option Explicit Public id As Integer ' Session to instrument. ' Declare variables to hold numeric values returned by ' ivscanf/ifread.
12 Programming Examples ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Initialize() On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Clear the interface. Call iclear(id) ' Get and display the device's *IDN? string. strQueryResult = DoQueryString("*IDN?") MsgBox "Result is: " + RTrim(strQueryResult), vbOKOnly, "*IDN? Result" ' Clear status and load the default setup.
Programming Examples 12 ' Or, configure the settings with individual commands: ' ----------------------------------------------------------------' Set trigger mode and input source. DoCommand ":TRIGger:MODE EDGE" Debug.Print "Trigger mode: " + _ DoQueryString(":TRIGger:MODE?") ' Set EDGE trigger parameters. DoCommand ":TRIGger:EDGE:SOURCe CHANnel1" Debug.Print "Trigger edge source: " + _ DoQueryString(":TRIGger:EDGE:SOURce?") DoCommand ":TRIGger:EDGE:LEVel 1.5" Debug.
12 Programming Examples Debug.Print "Setup bytes restored: " + CStr(lngRestored) ' Acquire data. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------DoCommand ":DIGitize" Exit Sub ErrorHandler: MsgBox "*** Error : " + Error, vbExclamation End End Sub ' ' Analyze the captured waveform. ' ------------------------------------------------------------------Private Sub Analyze() On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Make a couple of measurements.
Programming Examples 12 Close hFile ' Close file. MsgBox "Screen image written to " + strPath ' Download waveform data. ' ----------------------------------------------------------------Dim lngPoints As Long Dim dblXIncrement As Double Dim dblXOrigin As Double Dim dblYIncrement As Double Dim dblYOrigin As Double Dim dblYReference As Double ' Set the waveform source. DoCommand ":WAVeform:SOURce CHANnel1" Debug.
12 Programming Examples ' Set up output file: strPath = "c:\scope\data\waveform_data.csv" ' Open file for output. Open strPath For Output Access Write Lock Write As hFile ' Output waveform data in CSV format. Dim lngDataValue As Long For lngI = 10 To lngNumBytes - 2 ' Skip past 10-byte header. lngDataValue = CLng(byteArray(lngI)) ' Write time value, voltage value.
Programming Examples 12 Call ivprintf(id, command + " ") ' Write definite-length block bytes. Call ifwrite(id, byteArray(), lngBlockSize, vbNull, retCount) ' retCount is now actual number of bytes written.
12 Programming Examples End Function Private Function DoQueryIEEEBlock_Bytes(query As String) As Long On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Send query. Call ivprintf(id, query + vbLf) ' Read definite-length block bytes. Call ifread(id, byteArray(), ByteArraySize, vbNull, retCount) ' retCount is now actual number of bytes returned by read.
Index Symbols +9.9E+37, infinity representation, 772 +9.
Index calibrate temperature, 201 calibrate time, 202 CAN, 454 CAN acknowledge, 458, 704 CAN baud rate, 459 CAN commands, 627 CAN frame counters, reset, 398 CAN id pattern, 456 CAN signal definition, 460 CAN source, 461 CAN trigger, 455, 462 CAN trigger commands, 452 CAN trigger pattern id mode, 457 CAN triggering, 441 capture data, 146 capturing data, 48 CDISplay, 145 center frequency set, 245, 246 center of screen, 624 center reference, 434 center screen, vertical value at, 251, 254 channel, 176, 211 chan
Index DATA commands, 629 data conversion, 594 data displayed, 226 data format for transfer, 595 data output order, 597 data pattern length, 455, 532 data pattern width, 560 data point index, 621 data points, 184 data record, deep analysis, 424 data record, measurement, 424, 604 data record, precision analysis, 604 data record, raw acquisition, 604 data required to fill time buckets, 180 DATA source, I2S, 512 data structures, status reporting, 718 data transfer, 226 data, erasing, 145 data, saving and recal
Index example code, :WAVeform:DATA, 599 example code, :WAVeform:POINts, 603 example code, :WAVeform:PREamble, 607 example code, :WAVeform:SEGMented, 187 example code, *RST, 127 example programs, 4, 775 EXE (Execution Error) status bit, 117, 119 execution error detected in Standard Event Status, 119 exponential notation, 106 external glitch trigger source, 499 external range, 241 external trigger, 233, 236, 237, 479, 668 EXTernal trigger commands, 233 external trigger input impedance, 236, 668 EXTernal trig
Index HWERegister[:EVENt] (Hardware Event Event Register), 152, 734 I I/O softkey, 39, 40 I1080L50HZ, 565, 569 I1080L60HZ, 565, 569 I2S alignment, 502 I2S audio channel, 503 I2S clock slope, 504 I2S CLOCk source, 511 I2S commands, 634 I2S DATA source, 512 I2S pattern data, 505 I2S pattern format, 507 I2S range, 508 I2S receiver width, 510 I2S serial decode base, 406 I2S transmit word size, 516 I2S trigger commands, 500 I2S trigger operator, 514 I2S triggering, 441 I2S word select (WS) low, 517 I2S word se
Index low-pass filter used to limit bandwidth, 206, 235 LRN (Learn Device Setup), 121 lsbfirst, 597 M M1553 commands, 636 M1553 trigger commands, 540 M1553 trigger type, 546 magnitude of occurrence, 322 main sweep range, 437 main time base, 703 main time base mode, 431 making measurements, 290 MAN option for probe sense, 665, 669 manual cursor mode, 276 MARKer commands, 274 marker mode, 282 marker position, 283 marker readout, 685, 686 marker set for voltage measurement, 691, 692 marker sets start time, 6
Index non-volatile memory, label list, 229 normal acquisition type, 177, 593 normal trigger sweep mode, 440 notices, 2 NR1 number format, 106 NR3 number format, 106 Nth edge burst triggering, 441 Nth edge in a burst idle, 472 Nth edge in burst slope, 473 Nth edge of burst counter, 471 NTSC, 565, 569 null frame count (FlexRay), 402 NULL string, 421 number format, 106 number of points, 184, 602, 604 number of time buckets, 602, 604 numeric variables, 56 numeric variables, reading query results into multiple,
Index probe attenuation factor for selected channel, 213 PROBe commands, 641 probe head type, 214 probe ID, 215, 238 probe sense for oscilloscope, 665, 669 probe skew value, 216, 663 process sigma, mask test run, 361 program data, 752 program data syntax rules, 754 program initialization, 48 program message, 51, 113 program message syntax, 751 program message terminator, 752 program structure, 48 programming examples, 4, 775 protecting against calibration, 200 protection, 165, 167, 218, 240 PROTection comm
Index SEGMented commands, 645 segmented waveform save option, 393 segments, analyze, 185 segments, count of waveform, 609 segments, setting number of memory, 186 segments, setting the index, 187 segments, time tag, 610 select measurement channel, 315 self-test, 134 sensing a channel probe, 665 sensing a external trigger probe, 669 sensitivity of oscilloscope input, 213 sequence, 550, 551, 552 sequence trigger, 554 SEQuence trigger commands, 547 sequence triggering, 442 sequencer edge counter, 548 sequencer
Index TER (Trigger Event Register), 175, 724 termination conditions, mask test, 356 test sigma, mask test run, 361 test, self, 134 text, writing to display, 421 threshold voltage (lower) for measurement, 679 threshold voltage (upper) for measurement, 689 thresholds, 295, 682 thresholds used to measure period, 305 thresholds, how autoscale affects, 140 TIFF image format, 383 time base, 431, 432, 433, 434, 435, 703 time base commands introduction, 429 time base reset conditions, 125 time base window, 437, 43
Index trigger, SPI frame source, 563 trigger, SPI framing, 558 trigger, SPI pattern data, 559 trigger, SPI pattern width, 560 trigger, sweep, 451 trigger, TV line, 565 trigger, TV mode, 566, 706 trigger, TV polarity, 567 trigger, TV source, 568 trigger, TV standard, 569 trigger, UART base, 572 trigger, UART baudrate, 573 trigger, UART bit order, 574 trigger, UART parity, 578 trigger, UART polarity, 579 trigger, UART Rx source, 581 trigger, UART Tx source, 582 trigger, UART width, 584 trigger, USB, 589 trig
Index waveform peak-to-peak vertical value measured, 329 waveform period, 305 waveform persistence, 223 waveform RMS value measured, 331 waveform save option for segments, 393 waveform source channels, 611 waveform source subsource, 615 waveform standard deviation value measured, 313 waveform update rate, 424 waveform vertical amplitude, 324 waveform voltage measured at marker, 691, 692 waveform, byte order, 597 waveform, count, 598 waveform, data, 599 waveform, format, 601 waveform, points, 602, 604 wavef